Cambium Networks 89FT0009 Dual Channel 3.6GHz MIMO Subscriber Module Transceiver User Manual PMP 450 Planning Guide
Cambium Networks Inc. Dual Channel 3.6GHz MIMO Subscriber Module Transceiver PMP 450 Planning Guide
Contents
- 1. Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 c3
- 2. manual cbrs
Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 c3
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 2213408 |
| Application ID | lVK+Tv8TeJuHjmiXnDti8w== |
| Document Description | Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 c3 |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 224kB (2800060 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2014-03-12 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2014-03-20 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2014-03-10 13:48:33 |
| Producing Software | Adobe PDF Library 11.0 |
| Document Lastmod | 2014-03-10 13:51:26 |
| Document Title | PMP 450 Planning Guide |
| Document Creator | Acrobat PDFMaker 11 for Word |
| Document Author: | Martin Gray |
Cambium PMP 450 Planning Guide System Release 13.1 PMP 450 module essential information Default IP Address for Management GUI Access 169.254.1.1 Default Administrator Username admin Default Administrator Password (no password) Software Upgrade Procedure See “Updating the software version and using CNUT” in the PMP 450 Configuration and User Guide 1. On the radio GUI, navigate to Configuration, Unit Settings and select Set to Factory Defaults OR Resetting to Factory Defaults (2 options) ii 2. On the radio GUI, navigate to Configuration, Unit Settings and enable and save option Set to Factory Defaults Upon Default Plug Detection. When the unit is powered on with a default/override plug (see section “Acquiring the Override Plug” in the PMP 450 Configuration and User Guide) the radio will be returned to its factory default settings. pmp-0047 (March 2014) Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium Networks assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Cambium products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such Cambium products, programming, or services in your country. Copyrights This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party Software products described in this document may include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Restrictions Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Cambium. License Agreements The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement. High Risk Materials Components, units, or 3rd Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities. © 2014 Cambium Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved. pmp-0047 (March 2014) iii Safety and regulatory information This section describes important safety and regulatory guidelines that must be observed by personnel installing or operating PMP 450 equipment. Important safety information To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the safety guidelines in this section. Power lines Exercise extreme care when working near power lines. Working at heights Exercise extreme care when working at heights. Grounding and protective earth PMP 450 units must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user’s responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA, follow Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 (USA). In Canada, follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge unit, size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes. Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer. Powering down before servicing Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing. Primary disconnect device The AP or SM unit’s power supply is the primary disconnect device. External cables Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed to the outdoor environment. iv pmp-0047 (March 2014) RF exposure near the antenna Radio frequency (RF) fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on. Always turn off the power to the PMP 450 unit before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the antenna. Minimum separation distances Install the AP/SM so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons. The minimum separation distances for each frequency variant are specified in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 3-14. Important regulatory information The PMP 450 product is certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not allowed to cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands). Radar avoidance In countries where radar systems are the primary band users, the regulators have mandated special requirements to protect these systems from interference caused by unlicensed devices. Unlicensed devices must detect and avoid co-channel operation with radar systems. Installers and users must meet all local regulatory requirements for radar detection. To meet these requirements, users must set the correct Country Code during commissioning of the PMP 450. If this is not done, installers and users may be liable to civil and criminal penalties. Contact the Cambium helpdesk if more guidance is required. USA and Canada specific information The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has asked manufacturers to implement special features to prevent interference to radar systems that operate in the 5250-5350 and 5470-5725 MHz bands. These features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the UNII band. The use of the 5600 – 5650 MHz band is prohibited, even with detect-and-avoid functionality implemented. Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of FCC rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have been demonstrated to the FCC. In order to comply with these FCC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the PMP 450 for operation in the USA or Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with Country Codes that comply with FCC/IC rule. pmp-0047 (March 2014) Contents PMP 450 Planning Guide Contents PMP 450 module essential information ...............................................................................................................................ii Safety and regulatory information .................................................................................. iv Important safety information .......................................................................................................................................iv Important regulatory information ................................................................................................................................. v About This Planning Guide ........................................................................................... 1-4 General information ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5 Version information.................................................................................................................................................. 1-5 Contacting Cambium Networks ............................................................................................................................... 1-5 Problems and warranty..................................................................................................................................................... 1-7 Security advice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9 Warnings, cautions, and notes ........................................................................................................................................ 1-10 Overview of PMP 450.................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 Key features ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-11 Typical deployment ................................................................................................................................................ 1-12 System components ................................................................................................................................................ 1-13 Access Point (AP) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-15 Network connection................................................................................................................................................ 1-19 AP power supply .................................................................................................................................................... 1-19 Radio tab of the AP ................................................................................................................................................ 1-20 Further reading on the AP ...................................................................................................................................... 1-25 Subscriber Module (SM) ................................................................................................................................................ 1-26 Mounting brackets .................................................................................................................................................. 1-26 Network connection................................................................................................................................................ 1-26 SM power supply .................................................................................................................................................... 1-26 Further reading on the SM ...................................................................................................................................... 1-27 Radio tab of the SM ................................................................................................................................................ 1-31 Cabling and lightning protection .................................................................................................................................... 1-36 PMP and lightning protection ................................................................................................................................. 1-36 Outdoor connections ............................................................................................................................................... 1-36 Wireless operation.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-37 Time division duplexing ......................................................................................................................................... 1-37 OFDM and channel bandwidth............................................................................................................................... 1-37 Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt ................................................................................................................... 1-38 Adaptive modulation .............................................................................................................................................. 1-46 MIMO..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-46 Cyclic Prefix ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-46 Encryption .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-46 vi pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Further reading on wireless operation .....................................................................................................................1-46 System management .......................................................................................................................................................1-47 Management agent ..................................................................................................................................................1-47 Web server...............................................................................................................................................................1-47 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) ........................................................................................1-50 SNMP ......................................................................................................................................................................1-50 Network Time Protocol (NTP) ................................................................................................................................1-51 Wireless Manager (WM) .........................................................................................................................................1-51 Capacity upgrades ...................................................................................................................................................1-52 Software upgrade .....................................................................................................................................................1-52 Further reading on system management ..................................................................................................................1-53 Chapter 1: Planning considerations ......................................................................... 1-54 Regulatory planning ........................................................................................................................................................1-55 Obeying Regulatory limits ......................................................................................................................................1-55 Conforming to the limits .........................................................................................................................................1-55 Network migration planning ...........................................................................................................................................1-56 Example PMP 450 deployment scenario .................................................................................................................1-56 Sector capacity ........................................................................................................................................................1-58 Site planning ...................................................................................................................................................................1-65 AP or SM site selection ...........................................................................................................................................1-65 Power supply site selection .....................................................................................................................................1-65 Maximum cable lengths ..........................................................................................................................................1-65 Wind loading ...........................................................................................................................................................1-66 Link planning ..................................................................................................................................................................1-69 Range and obstacles ................................................................................................................................................1-69 Path loss considerations ...........................................................................................................................................1-92 Calculating maximum power level for connectorized AP units ..............................................................................1-92 Understanding Attenuation ......................................................................................................................................1-92 Calculating Link Loss .............................................................................................................................................1-93 Calculating Rx Signal Level ....................................................................................................................................1-93 Calculating Fade Margin .........................................................................................................................................1-94 Analyzing the RF Environment ......................................................................................................................................1-94 Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies ........................................................................................................................1-94 Analyzing the spectrum ...........................................................................................................................................1-95 Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves .................................................................................................................1-96 Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone ..................................................................................................1-96 Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters ...................................................................................................................1-97 Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool ..................................................................1-99 Selecting Sites for Network Elements...........................................................................................................................1-102 Surveying Sites ......................................................................................................................................................1-103 Clearing the Radio Horizon ...................................................................................................................................1-103 Calculating the Aim Angles ..................................................................................................................................1-104 Diagramming Network Layouts....................................................................................................................................1-105 Avoiding Self Interference ....................................................................................................................................1-105 pmp-0047 (March 2014) vii Contents PMP 450 Planning Guide Avoiding Other Interference ................................................................................................................................. 1-106 Grounding and lightning protection ............................................................................................................................. 1-107 The need for power surge protection .................................................................................................................... 1-107 Standards .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-107 Lightning protection zones ................................................................................................................................... 1-108 General protection requirements .......................................................................................................................... 1-109 Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation ...................................................................................... 1-110 Protection requirements for a wall installation ..................................................................................................... 1-111 Protection requirements on a high rise building ................................................................................................... 1-112 Configuration options for TDD synchronization ......................................................................................................... 1-115 GPS synchronization ............................................................................................................................................ 1-116 Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on the equipment building .............................................. 1-118 Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on a metal tower or mast ................................................ 1-118 Data network planning ................................................................................................................................................. 1-119 Understanding addresses ...................................................................................................................................... 1-119 Dynamic or static addressing ................................................................................................................................ 1-119 DNS Client ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-120 Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................................................... 1-120 Developing an IP addressing scheme ................................................................................................................... 1-121 Address Resolution Protocol ................................................................................................................................ 1-121 Allocating subnets ................................................................................................................................................ 1-122 Selecting non-routable IP addresses ..................................................................................................................... 1-122 Translation bridging ............................................................................................................................................. 1-123 Engineering VLANs ............................................................................................................................................. 1-123 Security planning ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-127 Isolating APs from the Internet ............................................................................................................................ 1-127 Managing module access by passwords ............................................................................................................... 1-127 Filtering protocols and ports ................................................................................................................................. 1-131 Port Lockdown ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-134 Isolating SMs ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-134 Filtering management through Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 1-135 Allowing management from only specified IP addresses ..................................................................................... 1-135 Configuring management IP by DHCP ................................................................................................................ 1-135 Planning for airlink security ................................................................................................................................. 1-136 Planning for RF Telnet Access Control ................................................................................................................ 1-136 Forwarding Downlink PPPoE PADI packets ....................................................................................................... 1-136 Planning for RADIUS integration ........................................................................................................................ 1-136 Planning for SNMP security ................................................................................................................................. 1-137 Ordering components ................................................................................................................................................... 1-138 PMP 450 component part numbers....................................................................................................................... 1-138 Chapter 2: Legal information ..................................................................................... 2-1 Cambium Networks end user license agreement ............................................................................................................. 2-2 Acceptance of this agreement ................................................................................................................................... 2-2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2 viii pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Grant of license .........................................................................................................................................................2-2 Conditions of use .......................................................................................................................................................2-2 Title and restrictions ..................................................................................................................................................2-3 Confidentiality ...........................................................................................................................................................2-4 Right to use Cambium’s name ..................................................................................................................................2-4 Transfer .....................................................................................................................................................................2-4 Updates ......................................................................................................................................................................2-4 Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................................2-5 Disclaimer .................................................................................................................................................................2-5 Limitation of liability ................................................................................................................................................2-5 U.S. government ........................................................................................................................................................2-6 Term of license ..........................................................................................................................................................2-6 Governing law ...........................................................................................................................................................2-6 Assignment ................................................................................................................................................................2-6 Survival of provisions ...............................................................................................................................................2-6 Entire agreement........................................................................................................................................................2-7 Third party software ..................................................................................................................................................2-7 Hardware warranty..........................................................................................................................................................2-10 Limit of liability ..............................................................................................................................................................2-11 Chapter 3: Reference information .............................................................................. 3-1 Equipment specifications ..................................................................................................................................................3-2 AP specifications .......................................................................................................................................................3-2 SM specifications ......................................................................................................................................................3-7 Wireless specifications....................................................................................................................................................3-10 General wireless specifications ...............................................................................................................................3-10 Data network specifications ............................................................................................................................................3-11 Ethernet interface ....................................................................................................................................................3-11 Compliance with safety standards...................................................................................................................................3-12 Electrical safety compliance ....................................................................................................................................3-12 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance .................................................................................................3-12 Human exposure to radio frequency energy ............................................................................................................3-13 Compliance with radio regulations .................................................................................................................................3-17 Type approvals ........................................................................................................................................................3-17 DFS for 5.4 GHz Radios .........................................................................................................................................3-18 Country Codes and available spectrum ...................................................................................................................3-20 FCC compliance testing ..........................................................................................................................................3-36 FCC and ICC IDs and certification numbers ...........................................................................................................3-36 Notifications....................................................................................................................................................................3-42 PMP 450 regulatory compliance .............................................................................................................................3-42 Appendix A: Glossary ..................................................................................................... I pmp-0047 (March 2014) ix List of Figures PMP 450 Planning Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram .......................................................................................................................................... 1-12 Figure 2 AP, Radio unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-15 Figure 3 AP, antenna ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-15 Figure 4 AP interfaces – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6GHz, 5 GHz............................................................................................... 1-16 Figure 5 AP interfaces - 5 GHz original layout .................................................................................................................... 1-17 Figure 6 AP ground and equilibrium membrane vent ........................................................................................................... 1-18 Figure 7 AP diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit ............................................................................................... 1-18 Figure 8 Radio tab of the AP ................................................................................................................................................ 1-20 Figure 9 PMP 450 Series SM................................................................................................................................................ 1-26 Figure 10 SM interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-27 Figure 11 Connectorized SM ................................................................................................................................................ 1-28 Figure 12 SM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit ............................................................................................ 1-29 Figure 13 Radio tab of the SM ............................................................................................................................................. 1-31 Figure 14 Custom Frequency tab of the SM ........................................................................................................................ 1-32 Figure 15 TDD Frame Division ............................................................................................................................................ 1-37 Figure 16 AP web-based management screenshot ................................................................................................................ 1-48 Figure 17 Determinants in Rx signal level............................................................................................................................ 1-93 Figure 18 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors .............................................................. 1-97 Figure 19 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors................................................................. 1-98 Figure 20 OFDM Frame Calculator tab .............................................................................................................................. 1-100 Figure 21 Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression) ............................................................................ 1-104 Figure 22 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones................................................................... 1-108 Figure 23 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle ............................................................................................. 1-109 Figure 24 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower ........................................................................................ 1-110 Figure 25 Grounding and lightning protection on wall ....................................................................................................... 1-111 Figure 26 Grounding and lightning protection on building ................................................................................................ 1-114 Figure 27 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building ................................................................................... 1-114 Figure 28 One unsynchronized AP in cluster resulting in self-interference ....................................................................... 1-117 Figure 29 GPS timing throughout the network ................................................................................................................... 1-117 Figure 30 Cambium network management domain ............................................................................................................ 1-120 Figure 31 Example of IP address in Class B subnet ........................................................................................................... 1-122 Figure 32 Categorical protocol filtering.............................................................................................................................. 1-133 Figure 33 AP DFS Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-18 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide List of Tables List of Tables Table 1 PMP 450 frequency variants .....................................................................................................................................1-14 Table 2 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 5 GHz .........................................................................1-16 Table 3 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 5 GHz original layout ................................................................................1-17 Table 4 AP interface descriptions and cabling – ground lug .................................................................................................1-18 Table 5 AP LED descriptions ................................................................................................................................................1-19 Table 6 AP Radio attributes ..................................................................................................................................................1-21 Table 7 SM Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................................1-28 Table 8 SM diagnostic LED descriptions ..............................................................................................................................1-30 Table 9 SM Radio attributes .................................................................................................................................................1-33 Table 10 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz ...........................................................................................1-39 Table 11 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8 GHz ...........................................................................................1-40 Table 12 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 2.4GHz ............................................................................................1-41 Table 13 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.5GHz ............................................................................................1-42 Table 14 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.6GHz ............................................................................................1-43 Table 15 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM .........................................1-44 Table 16 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM .........................................1-45 Table 17 Deployment scenario terminology descriptions ......................................................................................................1-56 Table 18 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) ......................................................................1-58 Table 19 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM (PMP 430 Series) ..................................................................1-58 Table 20 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM MIMO (PMP 450 Series) ......................................................1-59 Table 21 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM ..........................................................1-60 Table 22 Deployment scenario 1 ...........................................................................................................................................1-60 Table 23 Scenario 1 spectrum usage ......................................................................................................................................1-61 Table 24 Deployment scenario 2 ...........................................................................................................................................1-63 Table 25 Deployment scenario 2 spectrum usage ..................................................................................................................1-64 Table 26 Sync cable length specification...............................................................................................................................1-65 Table 27 Lateral force - metric ..............................................................................................................................................1-66 Table 28 Lateral force - US ...................................................................................................................................................1-67 Table 29 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-70 Table 30 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-71 Table 31 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth ...........................................................1-73 Table 32 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-74 Table 33 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-75 Table 34 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth ...........................................................1-76 Table 35 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-77 Table 36 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-78 Table 37 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth ...........................................................1-79 Table 38 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-80 Table 39 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .........................................................1-81 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 40 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .......................................................... 1-82 Table 41 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth ........................................................ 1-83 Table 42 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth ........................................................ 1-84 Table 43 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .......................................................... 1-85 Table 44 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................... 1-86 Table 45 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................... 1-87 Table 46 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth ......................... 1-88 Table 47 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................... 1-89 Table 48 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth ....................... 1-90 Table 49 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth ......................... 1-91 Table 50 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector ...................................................................................... 1-97 Table 51 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector ...................................................................................... 1-98 Table 52 OFDM Frame Calculator tab attributes ............................................................................................................... 1-100 Table 53 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes ........................................................................................................ 1-101 Table 54 Special case VLAN IDs ....................................................................................................................................... 1-124 Table 55 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules ...................................................................................................... 1-125 Table 56 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame ......................................................................................................................................... 1-126 Table 57 Identity-based user account permissions - AP ..................................................................................................... 1-128 Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - SM..................................................................................................... 1-130 Table 59 Ports filtered per protocol selections .................................................................................................................... 1-134 Table 60 Device default port numbers ................................................................................................................................ 1-134 Table 61 PMP 450 components .......................................................................................................................................... 1-138 Table 62 Connectorized AP physical specifications ............................................................................................................... 3-2 Table 63 SM physical specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 3-7 Table 64 PMP 450 wireless specifications ........................................................................................................................... 3-10 Table 65 PMP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications............................................................................................................. 3-11 Table 66 PMP 450 safety compliance specifications ............................................................................................................ 3-12 Table 67 EMC emissions compliance ................................................................................................................................... 3-12 Table 68 Power Compliance Margins ................................................................................................................................... 3-15 Table 69 Radio certifications ................................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Table 70 OFDM DFS operation based on Country Code setting.......................................................................................... 3-19 Table 71 Center channel details based on Country Code, 2.4 GHz ...................................................................................... 3-21 Table 72 AP Default combined transmits power per Country Code and Lower/Upper Band Edge Path Max TX Detail, 2.4 GHz................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-22 Table 73 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.5 GHz ..................................................................................... 3-23 Table 74 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.5 GHz band. ............................................................ 3-25 Table 75 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.6 GHz ..................................................................................... 3-26 Table 76 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.6 GHz band ............................................................. 3-28 Table 77 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.4 GHz ...................................................................................... 3-29 Table 78 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.8 GHz ...................................................................................... 3-30 Table 79 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.4 GHz band .................................................................. 3-31 Table 80 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.8 GHz band .................................................................. 3-34 Table 81 US FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers and Covered Configurations ...................................... 3-36 Table 82 Industry Canada approved antenna list .................................................................................................................. 3-43 Table 83 Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................... I 1-2 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-3 PMP 450 Planning Guide About This Planning Guide This guide describes the planning of the Cambium PMP 450 Series of point-to-multipoint wireless equipment deployment. It is intended for use by the system designer. The guide consists of the following chapters: 1-4 • 0Product description on page 1-6 • Chapter 1: Planning considerations on page 1-54 • Chapter 2: Legal information on page 2-1 • Chapter 3: Reference information on page 3-1 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide General information Version information The following shows the issue status of this document since it was first released: Issue Date of issue Remarks 001v000 September 2012 System Release 12.0 002v000 October 2012 Includes additional co-location information 003v000 November 2012 Updated for System Release 12.0.1 004v000 January 2013 Updated for System Release 12.0.2 005v000 March 2013 Updated for System Release 12.0.3/12.0.3.1 Includes additional performance details (SNR) 006v000 June 2013 Updated for System Release 12.1 008v000 September 2013 Updated for System Release 12.1.2 009v000 December 2013 Updated for System Release 12.2 010v000 February 2014 Updated for System Release 13.0 011v000 March 2014 Updated for System Release 13.1 007v000 Contacting Cambium Networks PMP support website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support Cambium main website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/ Sales enquiries: sales@cambiumnetworks.com Email support: support@cambiumnetworks.com Telephone numbers: For full list of Cambium support telephone numbers, see: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/contact-support Address: Cambium Networks 3800 Golf Road, Suite 360 Rolling Meadows, IL 60008 pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-5 PMP 450 Planning Guide Product description This chapter provides a high level description of the PMP 450 product. It describes in general terms the function of the product, the main product variants and typical deployment. It also describes the main hardware components. The chapter consists of the following topics: • Overview of PMP 450 on page 1-11: Introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the PMP 450. • Access Point (AP) on page 1-15: Describes the AP and its interfaces • Subscriber Module (SM) on page 1-26: Describes the SM and its interfaces • Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-36: Describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PMP 450 installation. • Wireless operation on page 1-37: Describes how the PMP 450 wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power control and security. • System management on page 1-47: Introduces the PMP 450 management system, including the web interface, installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades. Purpose Cambium Networks Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Cambium PMP equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained. Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or recommendations made in this document. Cross references References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references, emphasized in blue text in electronic versions, are active links to the references. This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents. Feedback We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure, content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. Send feedback to email support (see ‘Contacting Cambium Networks’). 1-6 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Problems and warranty Reporting problems If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this procedure to investigate and report: Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases. Visit the support website. http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier. Gather information from affected units such as: • The IP addresses and MAC addresses. • The software releases. • The configuration of software features. • Any available diagnostic downloads. • CNUT Support Capture Tool information Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support. See ‘Contacting Cambium Networks’ for URLs, email addresses and telephone numbers. Repair and service If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from the support website. Warranty Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium or a Cambium distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days. To register PMP products or activate warranties, visit the support website. Extended warranties are available for PMP products. For warranty assistance, contact the reseller or distributor. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-7 PMP 450 Planning Guide Using non-Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment and void the warranty. Contact Cambium for service and repair instructions. Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge. Use precautions to prevent damage. 1-8 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Security advice Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting and using these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects to be considered are protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about the parties involved. In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices, however the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies with the operator of the system. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-9 PMP 450 Planning Guide Warnings, cautions, and notes The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of the Cambium Networks document set. Warnings Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A warning has the following format: Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning. Cautions Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems, software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents no danger to personnel. A caution has the following format: Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution. Notes A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format: Note text. 1-10 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Overview of PMP 450 This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the PMP 450. Purpose Cambium PMP 450 Series networks are designed for wireless point-to-multipoint links in the unlicensed 2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands. Users must ensure that the PMP 450 Series complies with local operating regulations. The PMP 450 Series adds dramatically increased network throughput and capacity. The PMP 450 Series enables network operators to grow their business by offering more capacity for data, voice and video applications. Key features The Cambium PMP 450 Series offers the following benefits: • Cambium’s highest performing point-to-multipoint solution, with up to 90 Mbps usable throughput • State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi-In Multi-Out) technology • Better spectral efficiency than other MIMO alternatives • Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy Access Point site deployment and performance that is consistent regardless of subscriber loading • A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of any network application • MIMO Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on two different antennas. nLOS benefits and limitations In addition to providing LOS (Line-Of-Sight) connectivity, use of OFDM technology can provide nLOS (near LineOf-Sight) connectivity and sometimes NLOS (Non-Line-Of-Sight) connectivity: • LOS: the installer can see the AP from the SM and the first Fresnel zone is clear. • nLOS: the installer can see the AP from the SM, but a portion of the first Fresnel zone is blocked. • NLOS: the installer cannot see the AP from the SM and a portion or even much of the first Fresnel zone is blocked, but subsequent Fresnel zones are open. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-11 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram Whereas multi-pathing degrades a link in some technologies (FSK, for example), OFDM can often use multipathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in cases where the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends to help especially when obstacles are near the middle of the link, and less so when the obstacles are very near the SM or AP. However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 2.4/3.5/5.4/5.8 GHz frequency bands. Even with OFDM, these products should not be expected to penetrate walls or extensive trees and foliage. Typical deployment The PMP 450 Series consists of Access Point Modules and Subscriber Modules. The radio link operates on a single frequency channel in each direction using Time Division Duplex (TDD). Applications for the PMP 450 Series include: • High throughput enterprise applications • nLOS video surveillance in metro areas • Urban area network extension • Network extension into areas with foliage Greenfield deployment The PMP 450 Series equipment may be deployed as a standalone network deployment offering a high-speed access network. 1-12 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide System components PMP 450 Access Point • Access Point Module (AP): A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, networking, antenna, and surge suppression electronics. • Access Point Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply to the Access Point. • Cabling: Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, and connectors. PMP 450 Subscriber Module • Subscriber Module (SM): An integrated-antenna outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, antenna, and networking electronics. • Subscriber Module Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply to the Subscriber Module. • Cabling and lightning protection: Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, connectors and lightning protection (surge suppression). • Connectorized Subscriber Module (CSM): An outdoor transceiver unit containing all of the radio and network electronics that needs to be mated with a customer supplied external antenna. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-13 PMP 450 Planning Guide Product variants The PMP 450 Series is available in the following product variants: Table 1 PMP 450 frequency variants 1-14 Variant Region Frequency Coverage (MHz) Channel Bandwidth (MHz) 2.4 GHz PMP 450 FCC ISM Band 2400 – 2483.5 5/10/20 3.5 GHz PMP 450 3300 – 3600 5/10/20 Combined Transmit power limited based on Country Code setting. Available center frequencies based on Country Code setting. 3.6 GHz PMP 450 3650 – 3700 5/10/20 Combined Transmit power limited based on Country Code setting. Available center frequencies based on Country Code setting. 5470 - 5875 10/20 Combined Transmit power limited based on Country Code setting 5725 - 5875 5/10/20 US Only – locked to US Country Code EIRP limit of 36 dBm and 5.8GHz Only 5.4/5.8GHz PMP 450 FCC UNII Band 5.8-GHz PMP 450 (US ONLY) FCC ISM Band ETSI Band B ETSI Band C Variant Notes pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Access Point (AP) The AP is a self-contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The AP is supplied in a connectorized configuration for use with an external antenna. Connectorized units with external antennas can cope with more difficult radio conditions. Figure 2 AP, Radio unit pmp-0047 (March 2014) Figure 3 AP, antenna 1-15 PMP 450 Planning Guide AP interfaces The AP interfaces are illustrated below. Figure 4 AP interfaces – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6GHz, 5 GHz Path A RF Port Sync/Default Ethernet Path B RF Port Table 2 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 5 GHz Interface Path A RF Port Path B RF Port 2.4 GHz -45 degree RF connection to AP antenna 3.5 GHz -45 degree RF connection to AP antenna 3.6 GHz -45 degree RF connection to AP antenna 5 GHz Vertical RF connection to AP antenna 2.4 GHz +45 degree RF connection to AP antenna 3.5 GHz +45 degree RF connection to AP antenna 3.6 GHz +45 degree RF connection to AP antenna 5 GHz Horizontal RF connection to AP antenna Cabling 50 ohm RF cable, N-type 50 ohm RF cable, N-type Sync / Default Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet communications (management and data) 1-16 Function GPS synchronization signaling provides power to UGPS module and is the default plug port. RJ11 cable, default plug. Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet communications (management and data) RJ45 cable pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 5 AP interfaces - 5 GHz original layout Path V RF Port Path H RF Port Sync/Default Ethernet Unused Table 3 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 5 GHz original layout Interface Function Cabling Path V RF Port Vertical RF connection to AP antenna 50 ohm RF cable, N-type Path H RF Port Horizontal RF connection to AP antenna 50 ohm RF cable, N-type Sync / Default GPS synchronization signaling, provides power to UGPS module. Default plug port. RJ11 cable, default plug. Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet communications (management and data) RJ45 cable Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet communications (management and data) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-17 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 6 AP ground and equilibrium membrane vent Equilibrium Membrane Vent (do not cover) AP Ground The ports on the 3.5GHz and 3.6GHz APs are slightly different. Table 4 AP interface descriptions and cabling – ground lug Interface Ground Lug (bottom of unit) Function Cabling For grounding the unit 10 AWG copper wire AP diagnostic LEDs The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module. The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not indicate any status. Figure 7 AP diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit PWR 1-18 SYN/1 SES/2 GPS/3 ACT/4 LNK/5 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 5 AP LED descriptions LED Color when active Status information provided Notes PWR red DC power Always lit when power is correctly supplied. SYN/1 yellow Presence of sync Always lit on the AP. SES/2 green Unused on the AP GPS/3 red Pulse of sync Continuously lit as pulse as AP receives pulse. Flashes during data ACT/4 yellow Presence of data activity transfer. Frequency of flash on the Ethernet link is not a diagnostic indication. LNK/5 green Ethernet link Continuously lit when link is present. Network connection The network connection to a PMP 450 Series AP is made via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT Ethernet connection. Power is provided to the AP over the Ethernet connection using a patented non-standard powering technique. AP power supply The AP power supply generates the AP supply voltage (29 VDC) from the external DC source and injects the supply voltage into the AP. The power supply is connected to the AP and network equipment using Cat5e cable with RJ45 connectors. See Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-36. The PMP 450 AP can use the GigE power injector. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-19 PMP 450 Planning Guide Radio tab of the AP Figure 8 Radio tab of the AP 1-20 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide The Radio tab of the AP contains some of the configurable parameters that define how the AP operates. Table 6 AP Radio attributes Attribute Meaning Radio Mode Reserved for future modes of operation. Frequency Band Select the desired operating frequency band. Frequency Carrier Specify the frequency for the module to transmit. The default for this parameter is None. For a list of channels in the band, see the drop-down list on the radio GUI. Channel Bandwidth The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the channel bandwidth must match between the AP and the SM. Note: Release 12.1 introduces the Band Scan feature which will allow the SM to scan all Channel Bandwidths. Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used. Color Code Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature, typically for assigning each sector a different color code. Color code allows you to force an SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes). Max Range Enter a number of miles (or kilometers divided by 1.61, then rounded to an integer) for the furthest distance from which an SM is allowed to register to this AP. Do not set the distance to any greater number of miles. A greater distance • does not increase the power of transmission from the AP. • can reduce aggregate throughput. Regardless of this distance, the SM must meet the minimum requirements for an acceptable link. If the AP is in cluster, then you must set this parameter on all other APs in the cluster exactly the same, except as described in the NOTE admonition below. The default value of this parameter is 2 miles (3.2 km). pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-21 PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning Downlink Data Specify the percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames transmitted from the AP to the subscriber). For example, if the aggregate (uplink and downlink total) throughput on the AP is 90 Mb, then 75% specified for this parameter allocates 67.5 Mb for the downlink and 22.5 Mb for the uplink. The default for this parameter is 75%. This parameter must be set in the range of 15% - 85%, otherwise the invalid input will not be accepted and the previously-entered valid setting will be used. In order to prevent self-interference, the frame configuration needs to align. This includes Downlink Data, Max Range and Control Slots. 1-22 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning Control Slots This field indicates the number of (reserved) control slots configured by the operator. The SM uses reserved control slots and unused data slots for bandwidth requests Uplink Data Slots are used first for data. If they are not needed for data in a given frame, the remaining data slots can be used by the SMs for bandwidth requests. This allows SMs in sectors with a small number of control slots configured to still successfully transmit bandwidth requests using unused data slots. A higher number of control slots give higher probability that an SM’s bandwidth request will be correctly received when the system is heavily loaded, but with the tradeoff that sector capacity is reduced, so there will be less capacity to handle the request. The sector capacity reduction is about 200 kbps for each Control Slot configured in a 20 MHz channel at QPSK SISO modulation. The reduction in sector capacity is proportionally higher at MIMO modulations (2 times at QPSK MIMO, 4 times at 16 QAM MIMO, 6 times at 64 QAM MIMO and 8 times at 256 QAM MIMO). If too few reserved control slots are specified, then latency increases in high traffic periods. If too many are specified, then the maximum capacity is unnecessarily reduced. The suggested Control Slot settings as a function of the number of active VCs in the sector are shown in the table below. Number of VCs Recommended Number of Control Slots 1 to 10 11 to 50 51 to 150 151 and above Note that each SM uses one or two VCs. All SMs have a Low Priority Channel that uses one VC; if the High Priority Channel is enabled for the SM, then the SM uses a second VC. Therefore the number of active VCs in a sector is greater than or equal to the number of SMs registered to the AP in the sector. For example, a network including 20 SMs with High Priority Channel disabled and 20 SMs with High Priority Channel enabled has 60 active VCs and may be configured with 6 Control Slots. In a typical cluster, each AP should be set to the same number of control slots to assure proper timing in the send and receive cycles. However, where high incidence of small packets exists, as in a sector that serves several VoIP streams, additional control slots may provide better results. For APs in a cluster of mismatched control slots setting, or where PMP 450 is collocated with radios using different technologies, like PMP 430 or FSK, in the same frequency band, use the frame calculator. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-23 PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning Transmitter Output Power This value represents the combined power of the AP’s two transmitters. Nations and regions may regulate transmitter output power. For example • 5.4/5.8-GHz modules are available as connectorized radios, which require the operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory compliance. The professional installer of the equipment has the responsibility to External Gain Receive Quality Debug • maintain awareness of applicable regulations. • calculate the permissible transmitter output power for the module. • confirm that the initial power setting is compliant with national or regional regulations. • confirm that the power setting is compliant following any reset of the module to factory defaults. This value represents the amount of gain introduced by an external antenna. Module Type Recommended Setting OFDM connectorized with antenna that was purchased with it 17 To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number of fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and per channel (polarization). Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second processing. Broadcast Repeat Count The default is 2 repeats (in addition to the original broadcast packet, for a total of 3 packets sent for every one needed), and is settable to 1 or 0 repeats (2 or 1 packets for every broadcast). ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) is not present in downlink broadcast packets, since it would cause unnecessary uplink traffic from every SM for each broadcast packet. For successful transport without ARQ, the AP repeats downlink broadcast packets. The SMs filter out all repeated broadcast packets and, thus, do not transport further. The default of 2 repeats is optimum for typical uses of the network as an internet access system. In applications with heavy download broadcast such as video distribution, overall throughput is significantly improved by setting the repeat count to 1 or 0. This avoids flooding the downlink with repeat broadcast packets. 1-24 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning Subscriber Color Code Rescan (When not on a Primary Color Code) This timer may be utilized to initiate SM rescans in order to register to an AP configured with the SM‘s primary color code. The time (in minutes) for a subscriber to rescan (if this AP is not configured with the SM‘s primary color code). This timer will only fire once – if the Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle timer is configured with a nonzero value and the Subscriber Color Code Rescan expires, the Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle will be started. If the Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle timer is configured with a zero value and the Subscriber Color Code Rescan timer expires, the SM will immediately go into rescan mode Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle The time (in minutes) for a subscriber to rescan while idle (if this AP is not configured with the SM’s primary color code). This timer will fire periodic events. The fired event determines if any RF unicast traffic (either inbound or outbound) has occurred since the last event. If the results of the event determine that no RF unicast traffic has occurred (SM is idle), then the subscriber will rescan. Installation Color Code With this feature enabled on the AP and SM, operators may install and remotely configure SMs without having to configure matching color codes between the modules. While the SM is accessible for configuration from above the AP (for remote provisioning) and below the SM (for local site provisioning), no user data is passed over the radio link. When using the Installation Color Code feature, ensure that the SM is configured with the factory default Color Code configuration (Color Code 1 is “0”, Color Code 2-10 set to “0” and “Disable”). The status of the Installation Color Code can be viewed on the AP Eval web GUI page, and when the SM is registered using the Installation Color Code the message “SM is registered via ICC – Bridging Disabled!” is displayed in red on every SM GUI page. The Installation Color Code parameter is configurable without a radio reboot for both the AP and SM. If an SM is registered via Installation Color Code and the feature is then disabled, operators will need to reboot the SM or force it to reregister (i.e. using the Rescan APs functionality on the AP Eval page). SM Receive Target Level Each SM’s Transmitter Output Power is automatically set by the AP. The AP monitors the received power from each SM, and adjusts each SM’s Transmitter Output Power so that the received power at the AP from that SM is not greater what is set in this field. This value represents a “single-port” power perceived on the SM. Further reading on the AP For more information on the AP, refer to the following: • AP or SM site selection on page 1-65 describes how to select a site for the AP or SM. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-25 PMP 450 Planning Guide Subscriber Module (SM) The SM is a self-contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The SM is available in a connectorized model and also in an integrated antenna configuration, but may also be used with a passive reflector dish or CLIP (Cassegrain Lens for Improved Performance, 5 GHz only). Figure 9 PMP 450 Series SM 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz PMP 450 SMs appear a bit different from the existing PMP 450 SMs. Mounting brackets For mounting PMP 450 SMs, Cambium Networks offers the SMMB1A mounting bracket. Network connection The network connection to a PMP 450 Series SM is made via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT Ethernet connection. Power is provided to the SM over the Ethernet connection using a patented non-standard powering technique. SM power supply The SM power supply generates the SM supply voltage (29 VDC) from the external DC source and injects the supply voltage into the SM. The power supply is connected to the SM and network equipment using Cat5e cable with RJ45 connectors. Refer to Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-36. 1-26 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Further reading on the SM For more information on the SM, refer to the following: • AP or SM site selection on page 1-65 describes how to select a site for the SM. SM interfaces Figure 10 SM interfaces SM Ground (connectorized models) Ethernet Sync/Default 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz SMs appear a bit different from the existing 450 SMs. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-27 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 11 Connectorized SM External antenna cable, path A (labeled “A”) External antenna cable, path B Table 7 SM Interfaces Interface Cabling Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet communications (management and data) RJ45 Cable GPS synchronization signaling provides power to UGPS module and is the default plug port. RJ11 cable, default plug Ground Lug (rear of unit, connectorized only) For grounding the unit 10 AWG copper wire External antenna cable, path A (labeled “A”) 2.4 GHz -45 degree antenna connection 50 ohm RF cable, N-type 3.5 GHz -45 degree antenna connection 3.6 GHz -45 degree antenna connection 5 GHz Vertical antenna connection 2.4 GHz +45 degree antenna connection 3.5 GHz +45 degree antenna connection 3.6 GHz +45 degree antenna connection 5 GHz Horizontal antenna connection Ethernet Sync / Default External antenna cable, path B 1-28 Function 50 ohm RF cable, N-type pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide SM diagnostic LEDs The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module. The SM LEDs provide different status based on the mode of the SM. An SM in “operating” mode will register and pass traffic normally. An SM in “aiming” mode will not register or pass traffic, but will display (via LED panel) the strength of received radio signals (based on radio channel selected via Tools, Alignment). The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not indicate any status. Figure 12 SM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from front of the unit SM LED Display LED Labels LNK/5 ACT/4 GPS/3 SES/2 SYN/1 PWR The LED display of the 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz SMs appear a bit different from the existing 450 SMs. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-29 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 8 SM diagnostic LED descriptions Status information provided LED 1-30 Color when active SM in “Operating” SM in “Aiming” Mode Notes LNK/5 green Ethernet link ACT/4 yellow GPS/3 red Interference SES/2 green Strong Receive Signal Power SYN/1 yellow Medium Receive Signal Power Blinking from slow to full-on to indicate medium power, getting stronger. PWR red Registration Indicator Off when registered to AP. On when not registered to AP. Mode Presence of data activity on the Ethernet link Continuously lit when link is present. These five LEDs act as a bar graph to indicate the relative quality of alignment. As power level improves during alignment, more of these LEDs are lit. Flashes during data transfer. Frequency of flash is not a diagnostic indication. On - high interference. Blinking - medium interference. Off - low interference. Blinking from slow to full-on to indicate strong power, getting stronger. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Radio tab of the SM Figure 13 Radio tab of the SM pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-31 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 14 Custom Frequency tab of the SM 1-32 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide In the radio tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters. Table 9 SM Radio attributes Attribute Meaning Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List Check any frequency that you want the SM to scan for AP transmissions. Prior to System Release 13.1, the PMP 450 SM boot sequence included loading the current channel bandwidth (10 MHz or 20 MHz, but not both) and frequency band configuration (3.6 GHz) and scanning selected frequencies in the respective frequency band. After a scan of all the selected frequencies the SM would attempt to register to the best AP based on the SM’s current configuration. With the introduction of the Full Spectrum Band Scan feature in 12.0.3, SMs first boot into the smallest selected channel bandwidth (10 MHz, if selected) and scan all selected frequencies across the 3.6GHz frequency bands. After this scan, if a wider channel bandwidth is selected (20 MHz), the SM automatically changes to 20 MHz channel bandwidth and then scans for APs. After the SM finishes this final scan it will evaluate the best AP with which to register. If required for registration, the SM changes its channel bandwidth back to 10 MHz to match the best AP. The SM will attempt to connect to an AP based on power level (which affects the modulation state), channel bandwidth (which affects throughput) and number of SM registrations to the AP (which affects system contention performance). If it is desired to prioritize a certain AP over other available APs, operators may use the Color Code Priority feature on the SM. Utilization of the Color Code feature on the AP is recommended to further constrain the SM’s AP selection. If the SM does not find any suitable APs for registration after scanning all channel bandwidths, the SM restarts the scanning process beginning with the smallest configured channel bandwidth. By default, beginning with System Release 12.0.3 SMs are configured to scan all available frequencies and all available channel bandwidths. This allows operators to install SMs and allow them to register with no pre-configuration or staging required. SMs upgraded from a previous release to 12.0.3 retain frequency and channel bandwidth configuration. Selecting multiple frequencies and multiple channel bandwidths impacts the SM scanning time. The biggest consumption of time is in the changing of the SM channel bandwidth setting. The worst case scanning time is approximately two minutes after bootup (SM with all frequencies and channel bandwidths selected and registering to an AP at 10 MHz). If only one channel bandwidth is selected the time to scan all the available frequencies and register to an AP is approximately one minute after bootup. Other scanning features such as Color Code, Installation Color Code, and RADIUS authentication are unaffected by the Full Band Scan feature. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-33 PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning Channel Bandwidth The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. Selecting multiple channel bandwidths will increase registration and reregistration times. Cyclic Prefix Scan The cyclic prefix for which AP scanning is executed. AP Selection Method Operators may configure the method by which a scanning SM selects an AP. By default, AP Selection Method is set to “Optimize for Throughput”, which has been the mode of operation in releases prior to 12.0.3.1. Power Level: AP selection based solely on power level OR Optimize for Throughput: AP selection based on throughput optimization – the selection decision is based on power level (which affects the modulation state), channel bandwidth (which affects throughput) and number of SM registrations to the AP (which affects system contention performance). Color Code 1 to 10 Color code allows you to force the SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the SM can communicate with multiple APs. For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Specify a value from 0 to 254. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature, typically for assigning each sector a different color code. The default setting for the color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes). SMs may be configured with up to 10 color codes. These color codes can be tagged as Primary, Secondary, or Tertiary, or Disable. When the SM is scanning for APs, it will first attempt to register to an AP that matches one of the SM’s primary color codes. Failing that, the SM will continue scanning and attempt to register to an AP that matches one of the SM’s secondary color codes. Failing that, the SM will continue scanning and attempt to register to an AP that matches one of the SM’s tertiary color codes. This is all done in the scanning mode of the SM and will repeat until a registration has occurred. Color codes in the same priority group are treated equally. For example, all APs matching one of the SM’s primary color codes are analyzed equally. Likewise, this evaluation is done for the secondary and tertiary groups in order. The analysis for selecting an AP within a priority group is based on various inputs, including signal strength and number of SMs already registered to each AP. The first color code in the configuration is the pre-Release 9.5 color code. Thus, it is always a primary color code for legacy reasons. The color codes can be disabled, with the exception of the first color code. 1-34 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning External Gain This value represents the amount of gain introduced by an external antenna. Receive Quality Debug Module Type Recommended Setting OFDM integrated antenna with LENS OFDM Integrated antenna with CLIP OFDM integrated antenna with reflector dish 15 To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number of fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and per channel (polarization). Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second processing. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-35 PMP 450 Planning Guide Cabling and lightning protection This section describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PMP 450 installation. PMP and lightning protection Due to the full metallic connection to the tower or support structure through the AP antenna, grounding the AP and installing a 600SS surge suppressor at the Ethernet cable building ingress is strongly recommended. This suppresses overvoltages and overcurrents such as those caused by near-miss lightning. APs provide a grounding lug for grounding to the tower or support structure. The PMP 450 Series is not designed to survive direct lightning strikes. For this reason the unit should not be installed as the highest point in a localized area. Outdoor connections The term ‘drop cable’ refers to the cable that is used for all connections that terminate outside the building, for example, connections between the AP/SM, surge suppressors (if installed), GPS receivers (if installed) and the power supply injector. The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections: 1-36 • Use only shielded cables and connectors to resist interference and corrosion • For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief • Include a 2 ft (0.6 m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal expansion and contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed • Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector at the device • Properly crimp all connectors • Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Wireless operation This section describes how the PMP 450 wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power control and security. Time division duplexing The system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) – one channel alternately transmits and receives rather than using one channel for transmitting and a second channel for receiving. To accomplish TDD, the AP must provide sync to its SMs. Furthermore, collocated APs must be synced together – an unsynchronized AP that transmits during the receive cycle of a collocated AP can prevent a second AP from being able to decode the signals from its SMs. In addition, across a geographical area, APs that can “hear” each other benefit from using a common sync to further reduce self-interference within the network. Modules use TDD on a common frequency to divide frames for uplink (orange) and downlink (green) usage, as shown in the figure below. For more information on synchronization configuration options, see section Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool on page 1-99. Figure 15 TDD Frame Division Time OFDM and channel bandwidth The PMP 450 Series transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal may be configured to 5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10 MHz or 20 MHz. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-37 PMP 450 Planning Guide Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt PMP 450 Series products offer five levels or speeds of operation – 1x (QPSK), 2x (QPSK-MIMO-B), 4x (16QAMMIMO-B), 6x (64QAM-MIMO-B), and 8x (256QAM-MIMO-B). If received power is less due to distance between the AP and the SM or due to obstructions, or if interference affects the RF environment, the system will automatically and dynamically adjust links to the best operation level. The system chooses its operation rate dynamically, based on an internal ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) error control method. With ARQ, every data slot of every frame sent over the air (except downlink broadcast) is expected to be acknowledged by the receiver, and if acknowledgement is not received, the data is resent. The sending unit monitors these resends, and adjusts the operation rate accordingly. A normal system may have links that change levels of operation as the RF environment changes. Furthermore, the links operate independently; normal operation can have a downlink running at 6x while the uplink RF environment only supports 2x. Optimal sector utilization involves having as many links as possible running at 8x. This provides as much capacity as possible for the sector. 1-38 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 10 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz Product Performance Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO 16-QAM-MIMO 64-QAM-MIMO 256-QAM-MIMO with Integrated SM antenna 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 8.2 mi / 13.12 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with Integrated SM antenna 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 5.3 mi / 8.48 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 4 mi / 6.4 km 2.8 mi / 4.48 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 5.2 mi / 8.32 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 30 Mbps 60 Mbps 98 Mbps 128 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 13 Mbps 26 Mbps 42 Mbps 55 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 8 Mbps 14 Mbps 18 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -86 dBm -86 dBm -79 dBm -72 dBm -61 dBm 10 MHz Channel -88 dBm -88 dBm -82 dBm -75 dBm -62 dBm 5 MHz Channel -90 dBm -90 dBm -84 dBm -80 dBm -64 dBm 20 MHz Channel 124.9 121.9 114.9 107.9 96.9 10 MHz Channel 124 121 115.1 108 94.8 5 MHz Channel 123.3 120.3 114.4 110 94.3 Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 * † 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5.4GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 5.4GHz Nominal Per-Chain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) ‡ Link Budget, Integrated (dB) Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. ‡ PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. † pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-39 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 11 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8 GHz Product Performance Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO 16-QAM-MIMO 64-QAM-MIMO 256-QAM-MIMO with Integrated SM antenna 8.5 mi / 13.6 km 6 mi / 9.6 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 30.3 mi / 48.48 km 13.7 mi / 21.92 km 5.6 mi / 8.96 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Integrated SM antenna 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 8.3 mi / 13.28 km 3.6 mi / 5.76 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 32.9 mi / 52.64 km 23.3 mi / 37.28 km 10.3 mi / 16.48 km 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km with Integrated SM antenna 14.5 mi / 23.2 km 10.3 mi / 16.48 km 5.1 mi / 8.16 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 28.9 mi / 46.24 km 14.3 mi / 22.88 km 6.3 mi / 10.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 30 Mbps 60 Mbps 98 Mbps 128 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 13 Mbps 26 Mbps 42 Mbps 55 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 8 Mbps 14 Mbps 18 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -87 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm -72 dBm -62 dBm 10 MHz Channel -90 dBm -90 dBm -83 dBm -76 dBm -64 dBm 5 MHz Channel -91 dBm -91 dBm -85 dBm -79 dBm -69 dBm 20 MHz Channel 130.5 127.5 120.6 112.8 102.5 10 MHz Channel 133.2 130.2 123.1 115.1 105 5 MHz Channel 135.1 132.1 126 118.9 107.5 Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 § 5.8GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 5.8GHz Nominal Per-Chain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) ** Link Budget, Integrated (dB) § Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. ** 1-40 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 12 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 2.4GHz Product Performance Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO 16-QAM-MIMO 64-QAM-MIMO 256-QAM-MIMO with Integrated SM antenna 15.2 mi / 24.32 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 17.1 mi / 27.36 km 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 3.6 mi / 5.76 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 29 mi / 46.4 km 14.4 mi / 23.04 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km with Integrated SM antenna 27.1 mi / 43.36 km 19.2 mi / 30.72 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 17.1 mi / 27.36 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 30 Mbps 59 Mbps 96 Mbps 129 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 13 Mbps 26 Mbps 42 Mbps 55 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 9 Mbps 14 Mbps 18 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -86 dBm -86 dBm -80 dBm -73 dBm -66 dBm 10 MHz Channel -90 dBm -90 dBm -83 dBm -76 dBm -66 dBm 5 MHz Channel -91 dBm -91 dBm -86 dBm -78 dBm -68 dBm 20 MHz Channel 128 125 119 112 105 10 MHz Channel 132 129 121.6 115.5 104 5 MHz Channel 133 130 125 117 107 Modulation 2.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 2.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth 2.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 †† 2.4GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 2.4GHz Nominal Per-Chain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) ‡‡ Link Budget, Integrated (dB) †† Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical/+45) and Channel B (Horizontal/-45). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. ‡‡ pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-41 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 13 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.5GHz Product Performance Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO 16-QAM-MIMO 64-QAM-MIMO 256-QAM-MIMO with Integrated SM antenna 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 6.9 mi / 11.04 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 24.6 mi / 39.36 km 12.5 mi / 20 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 10.7 mi / 17.12 km 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 38 mi / 60.8 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 6.6 mi / 10.56 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 30 Mbps 59 Mbps 96 Mbps 129 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 13 Mbps 26 Mbps 42 Mbps 55 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 9 Mbps 14 Mbps 18 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -87 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm -73 dBm -66 dBm 10 MHz Channel -90 dBm -90 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm -70 dBm 5 MHz Channel -92 dBm -92 dBm -86 dBm -80 dBm -73 dBm 20 MHz Channel 129.2 129.2 123.3 116.3 109.3 10 MHz Channel 132.4 132.4 124.5 118.6 112.5 5 MHz Channel 134.1 134.1 128.3 121.3 113.1 Modulation 3.5GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 3.5GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth 3.5GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 §§ 3.5GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 3.5GHz Nominal Per-Chain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) *** Link Budget, Integrated (dB) §§ Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. *** 1-42 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 14 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.6GHz Product Performance Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO 16-QAM-MIMO 64-QAM-MIMO 256-QAM-MIMO with Integrated SM antenna 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 6.9 mi / 11.04 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 24.6 mi / 39.36 km 12.5 mi / 20 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 10.7 mi / 17.12 km 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 38 mi / 60.8 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 6.6 mi / 10.56 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 30 Mbps 59 Mbps 96 Mbps 129 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 13 Mbps 26 Mbps 42 Mbps 55 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 9 Mbps 14 Mbps 18 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -87 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm -73 dBm -66 dBm 10 MHz Channel -90 dBm -90 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm -70 dBm 5 MHz Channel -92 dBm -92 dBm -86 dBm -80 dBm -73 dBm 20 MHz Channel 129.2 129.2 123.3 116.3 109.3 10 MHz Channel 132.4 132.4 124.5 118.6 112.5 5 MHz Channel 134.1 134.1 128.3 121.3 113.1 Modulation 3.6GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 3.6GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth 3.6GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 ††† 3.6GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 3.6GHz Nominal Per-Chain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) ‡‡‡ Link Budget, Integrated (dB) ††† Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. ‡‡‡ pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-43 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 15 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM Product Performance Details Parameter Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 AP §§§ **** 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 430 SM 5.4GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 5.4GHz Nominal PerChain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) †††† Link Budget, Integrated (dB) 1x 2x 3x QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 6.3 mi / 10.08 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Integrated SM antenna 5.3 mi / 8.48 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with Integrated SM antenna 6.7 mi / 10.72 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 28 Mbps 48 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 12 Mbps 20 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 7 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -87 dBm -80 dBm -74 dBm 10 MHz Channel -89 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm 5 MHz Channel -94 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm 20 MHz Channel 127.3 120.4 111.3 10 MHz Channel 125.8 119.8 111.5 5 MHz Channel 127.8 120.4 110.3 §§§ Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. †††† PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. **** 1-44 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 16 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM Product Performance Details Parameter 1x 2x 3x QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 9.9 mi / 15.84 km 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 24.8 mi / 39.68 km 9.3 mi / 14.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 12.4 mi / 19.84 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 35 mi / 56 km 13.5 mi / 21.6 km with Integrated SM antenna 19.1 mi / 30.56 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km 3 mi / 4.8 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 20 MHz Channel: (up+down) 13 Mbps 28 Mbps 48 Mbps 10 MHz Channel: (up+down) 6 Mbps 12 Mbps 20 Mbps 5 MHz Channel: (up+down) 2 Mbps 4 Mbps 7 Mbps 20 MHz Channel -87 dBm -80 dBm -74 dBm 10 MHz Channel -89 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm 5 MHz Channel -94 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm 20 MHz Channel 131.8 124.8 116.3 Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 20 MHz channel bandwidth 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 10 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 450 AP ‡‡‡‡ 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) – 5 MHz channel bandwidth PMP 430 SM 5.8GHz Max. Aggregate Throughput with 1/16 Cyclic Prefix to 1 SM (75%/25% DL/UL Ratio) – RF Link Test 5.8GHz Nominal PerChain Receive SM RX Sensitivity (including FEC) §§§§ Link Budget, Integrated (dB) 10 MHz Channel 133.8 127.8 119.5 5 MHz Channel 137.5 129.5 121.5 ‡‡‡‡ Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings. §§§§ pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-45 PMP 450 Planning Guide Adaptive modulation PMP 450 units can transport data over the wireless link using a number of different modulation modes. The radio automatically selects QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) - SISO, QPSK-MIMO, 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) - MIMO, 64-QAM - MIMO, or 256-QAM - MIMO based on the RF environment to provide 1x, 2x, 4x, 6x and 8x operation. MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) techniques provide protection against fading and increase the probability that the receiver will decode a usable signal. When the effects of MIMO are combined with those of OFDM techniques and a high link budget, there is a high probability of a robust connection over a non-line-of-sight path. The sub-feature that comprises the MIMO technique utilized in the PMP 450 product is: • Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on two different antennas. Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is repeated at the beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multi-pathing to settle before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used. Encryption The Cambium PMP 450 Series supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the wireless link. The PMP 450 Series supports the following forms of encryption for security of the wireless link: • DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance or throughput of the system. • AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A. Further reading on wireless operation For information on planning wireless operation, see the following: • 1-46 Regulatory planning on page 1-55 describes the regulatory restrictions that affect radio spectrum usage, such as frequency range. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide System management This section introduces the PMP 450 management system, including the web interface, installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades, and management software. Management agent PMP 450 equipment is managed through an embedded management agent. Management workstations, network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using the module’s Ethernet port or over-the air (SM). The management agent supports the following interfaces: • Hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) • RADIUS authentication • Simple network management protocol (SNMP) • Network time protocol (NTP) • System logging (Syslog) • Wireless Manager (WM) software • Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) software Web server The PMP 450 management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via the HTTP interface.. Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the PMP 450 equipment from a locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a management network, without requiring any special management software. The web-based interfaces are the only interfaces supported for installation of PMP 450, and for the majority of PMP 450 configuration management tasks. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-47 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 16 AP web-based management screenshot 1-48 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Web pages The web-based management interfaces provide comprehensive web-based fault, configuration, performance and security management functions organized into the following web-pages and groups: Access Point web-pages: • Home: The Home web-page reports the general device status, session status, remote subscriber status, event log information, network interface status, and layer 2 neighbor information. • Configuration: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general device parameters, as well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, time, VLAN, DiffServ, protocol filtering, and unit settings. • Statistics: The Statistics web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the scheduler, SM registration failures, bridge control block, bridging table, Ethernet, radio, VLAN, data VC, throughput, filter, ARP, overload, DHCP relay, pass through, and DNS. • Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and operation including link capacity test, frame calculator, subscriber configuration, link status, remote spectrum analyzer, sessions, and DNS test. • Logs: The Logs web-page displays logs related to device operation including AP sessions, AP authentication state machine, AP authorization state machine, and EAP Radius. • Accounts: These web-pages are used to configure device user accounts. • Quick Start: The Quick Start web-page provides a walkthrough of configuring radio parameters for initial operation. • Copyright: The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device copyright information. Subscriber Module web-pages: • Home: The Home web-page reports the general device status, event log information, network interface status, and layer 2 neighbor information. • Configuration: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general device parameters, as well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, VLAN, DiffServ, protocol filtering, NAT, PPPoE, NAT port mapping, and unit settings. • Statistics: The Statistics web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the scheduler, bridge control block, bridging table, translation table, Ethernet, radio, VLAN, data VC, filter, NAT, NAT DHCP, ARP, overload, PPPoE, peer information, and DNS. • Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and operation including a spectrum analyzer, alignment configuration and tool, link capacity test, AP evaluation, frame calculator, BER results, link status, and DNS test. • Logs: The Logs web-page displays logs related to device operation including the NAT table, SM session, SM authentication, SM authorization, PPPoE session, and EAP Radius. • Accounts: These web-pages are used to configure device user accounts. • PDA: The PDA web-page includes 320 x 240 pixel formatted displays of information important to installation and alignment for installers using legacy PDA devices. All device web pages are compatible with touch devices such as smart phones and tablets. • Copyright: The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device copyright information. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-49 PMP 450 Planning Guide Identity-based user accounts When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to four user accounts, each of which may have one of the four possible roles: • ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates. • INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user. • TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view informational web pages • GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab See Table 57 Identity-based user account permissions - AP on page 1-128 and Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - SM on page 1-130 for detailed information on account permissions. Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) The PMP 450 system includes support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) protocol functionality including: • Authentication: Allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from connecting to “rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but not used for APs. • SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), High Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when an SM registers to an AP. • SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing. This accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP. • Centralized AP and SM user name and password management: Allows AP and SM usernames and access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician) to be centrally administered in the RADIUS server instead of on each radio and tracks access events (logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This accounting does not track and report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management System (EMS) such as Cambium Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability to perform accounting functions on the subscriber/end user/customer account. • Framed-IP-Address: Operators may use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing to SM modules. SNMP • 1-50 The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP interface. The management agent is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c using 5 Management Information Base (MIB) files which are available for download from the Cambium Networks Support website (https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450). pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Network Time Protocol (NTP) The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run with or without a connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display local time by setting the time zone and daylight saving in the Time web page. If an NTP server connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at regular intervals. PMP 450 devices may receive NTP data from a CMM3 or CMM4 module, an NTP server configured in the system’s management network or a UGPS module. The Time Zone option is configurable on the AP’s Time Configuration page, and may be used to offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. When set on the AP, the offset will be set for the entire sector (SMs will be notified of the current Time Zone upon initial registration). If a Time Zone change is applied, the SMs will be notified of the change in a best effort fashion, meaning some SMs may not pick up the change until the next re-registration. Time Zone changes are noted in the Event Log of the AP and SM. An AP which is receiving NTP date and time information from an NTP server or from a GPS synchronization source may be used as an NTP server. Any client which has IP connectivity to the AP may request NTP date and time information from the AP. No additional configuration (other than the AP receiving valid NTP data) is required to use the AP as an NTP server. Wireless Manager (WM) Cambium Networks Wireless Manager 4.0 is recommended for managing PMP 450 networks. You can achieve better uptime through better visibility of your network with the Cambium Wireless Manager. This network management software tool offers breakthrough map-based visualization capabilities using embedded Google maps, and combined with advanced configuration, provisioning, alerting and reporting features you can control your entire outdoor wireless network including Mesh Wide Area Network, and Point-to-Multipoint and Point-to-Point solutions as well as other SNMP enabled devices. With its powerful user interface you will not only be able to control your network's access, distribution and backhaul layers, but you will also have visibility to WLAN sites and be able to quickly launch indoor network management systems. Some key features of Wireless Manager are: • Template-Based Configuration: With Wireless Manager's user-defined templates you can accelerate the process for the configuration of the devices you add to your network resulting in quicker and easier deployments. The template-based functionality provides an automated way to configure large numbers of network devices with just a few mouse clicks, and can be scheduled to occur at any time via Wireless Manager's Task Scheduler. • Ultralight Thin Client: With the growing mobile workforce it is important to have access to the status of your network at any time. With Wireless Manager you can view the status and performance of your entire wireless network via a compact web interface accessible by your smart phone. • Map-Based Visualization: Wireless Manager overlays sophisticated real-time information about your network elements onto building layouts and dynamic Google maps. Visuals can be scaled to view an entire city or building or a specific area, floor or link. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-51 PMP 450 Planning Guide • High Availability Architecture Support: Wireless Manager offers a high availability option, providing a highly reliable and redundant network management solution that ensures you always have management access to your network. • High Scalability: The enhanced Wireless Manager offers you server scalability with support for up to 10,000 nodes as well as support for distributed server architecture. Cambium’s Wireless Manager 4.0 available for download at: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/wireless-manager/ Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP 450 Series products. The Canopy Network Updater Tool: • automatically discovers all network elements • executes a UDP command that initiates and terminates the Auto-update mode within APs. This command is both secure and convenient: o For security, the AP accepts this command from only the IP address that you specify in the Configuration page of the AP. o For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration parameter in the APs to the IP address of the Network Updater server when the server performs any of the update commands. • allows you to choose among updating o your entire network. o only elements that you select. o only network branches that you select. • provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script that o you define. o Cambium supplies. CNUT is available at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/ Capacity upgrades Capacity upgrades are supplied as an access key purchased from your Cambium Point-to-Multipoint distributor or solutions provider. The upgrade is applied by entering the supplied URL in a PMP 450 module-connected web browser address bar. Software upgrade CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP 450 Series products. CNUT is available at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/ 1-52 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Further reading on system management For more information on system management, see • Security planning on page 1-127 describes how to plan for PMP 450 links to operate in secure modes. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-53 PMP 450 Planning Guide Chapter 1: Planning considerations This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PMP 450 network. The following topics are described in this chapter: 1-54 • Regulatory planning on page 1-55 describes how to plan PMP 450 links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation. • Network migration planning on page 1-56 presents migration scenarios to aid in planning a network deployment • Site planning on page 1-65 describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for the equipment • Link planning on page 1-66 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, path loss and throughput. • Analyzing the RF Environment on page 1-94 describes how to map RF neighbor frequencies, anticipate reflection, assess RF obstructions in the Fresnel Zone, and plan channel usage. • Selecting Sites for Network Elements on page 1-102 describes how to survey sites, find expected coverage areas, clear the radio horizon, and calculate aim angles. • Diagramming Network Layouts on page 1-105 includes tips on how to avoid self-interference as well as interference from external sources. • Grounding and lightning protection on page 1-107 discusses wiring standards, the need for surge protection, lightning protection zones, and general protection requirements. • Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 1-115 covers the importance of GPS synchronization as well as planning for installation • Data network planning on page 1-119 discusses IP networking and other networking features provided with the PMP 450 product • Security planning on page 1-127 can be referenced for information regarding security features of the product. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Regulatory planning This section describes how to plan PMP 450 links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PMP product is operated in accordance with local regulatory limits. Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the PMP network is required. Obeying Regulatory limits The local regulator may restrict frequency usage and channel width, and may limit the amount of conducted or radiated transmitter power. Some countries impose conducted power limits on products operating in the 2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz, 3.6GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands. For detailed information, see Compliance with radio regulations on page 3-17. Conforming to the limits Ensure the system is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by setting the appropriate Country Code setting on the APs and SMs in the network. When using connectorized APs with external antennas, the regulations may require the maximum transmit power to be reduced. To ensure that regulatory requirements are met for connectorized installations, see Calculating maximum power level for connectorized AP units on page 1-92. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-55 PMP 450 Planning Guide Network migration planning The PMP 450 Series offers current network operators the ability to migrate to PMP 450 for expanded network capacity and capability. The following sections are provided to aid in establishing a planning framework for deploying a PMP 450 system. Example PMP 450 deployment scenario The following sections detail example network deployment scenarios for the PMP 450 product. This table may be referenced to begin planning the PMP 450 deployment based on the current network configuration (if applicable). Definitions of deployment scenario terminology Table 17 Deployment scenario terminology descriptions Term Definition Existing System Release The current running system software release Existing Number of Sectors The total number of AP sectors co-located in the current system Existing Modulation The type of modulation used in the current network. “FSK” indicates an existing PMP 1x0 series network, and “OFDM” indicates an existing PMP 430 network. The current deployment’s usage of frequency across tower sectors. For example, in a six AP sector deployment, the following represents an ABC frequency re-use pattern. Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern • Sector 1 (A): 5740 • Sector 2 (B): 5760 • Sector 3 (C): 5780 • Sector 4 (A): 5740 • Sector 5 (B): 5760 • Sector 6 (C): 5780 The deployment scenarios define their own customized examples of frequency re-use patterns. For multiple AP cluster deployments, see Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters on page 1-97 Existing Ch BW (MHz) 1-56 The channel size, or channel bandwidth used in the current system. For FSK (PMP 1x0 series) deployments, the channel bandwidth is always 20 MHz (except 900 MHz FSK, which operate with 8 MHz channel bandwidth). For OFDM (PMP 430) deployments, the channel size may be 5, 10, or 20 MHz. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Term Definition Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) The total amount of spectrum, in MHz, which is used by the existing system. Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) The total amount of throughput, in Mbps, available in the current network deployment. Existing Additional Frequencies Available (MHz) The number of additional frequencies unused by the current deployment that are available for usage by PMP 450 equipment. FINAL: Aggregate Throughput (Mbps) The aggregate throughput available after upgrading to a PMP 450 network. Resulting Number of Sectors The number of sectors configured in the new PMP 450 network installation. Resulting Modulation The modulation scheme utilized in the new PMP 450 network installation. Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern The new frequency re-use pattern utilized in the new PMP 450 network installation. Each deployment scenario in this section includes a custom example of a frequency re-use plan. Resulting Ch BW (MHz) The resulting channel bandwidth configured in the PMP 450 system. Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) The total amount of spectrum which is used by the existing system. Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) The aggregate throughput available after upgrading to a PMP 450 network. Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate Tower Throughput The amount of increase in tower (all sectors) throughput after upgrading to a PMP 450 network. Total Bandwidth Used (During Migration) (MHz) The total amount of spectrum (in MHz) used when migrating to a PMP 450 deployments. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-57 PMP 450 Planning Guide Sector capacity The following table exhibits the maximum aggregate sector throughput for several Cambium network deployments. This table may be used as a reference for planning new networks or for planning network upgrades. Table 18 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) Air Interface Rate Adapt Ch BW (MHz) Cyclic Prefix Maximum Aggregate Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps) FSK (PMP 1x0 Series – 900 MHz) 1x N/A 2.4 FSK (PMP 1x0 Series – 900 MHz) 2x N/A 4.8 FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) 1x 20 N/A FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) 2x 20 N/A 14 Table 19 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1-58 Air Interface Rate Adapt Ch BW (MHz) Cyclic Prefix Maximum Aggregate Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps) OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1x CP 1/16 3.5 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 2x CP 1/16 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 3x CP 1/16 10.5 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1x 10 CP 1/16 7.5 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 2x 10 CP 1/16 15 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 3x 10 CP 1/16 22.5 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1x 20 CP 1/16 16.5 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 2x 20 CP 1/16 32 OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 3x 20 CP 1/16 45+ pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 20 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM MIMO (PMP 450 Series) Air Interface Rate Adapt Ch BW (MHz) Cyclic Prefix Maximum Aggregate Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps) OFDM (SISO) (PMP 450 Series) 1x CP 1/16 OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) 2x CP 1/16 OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) 4x CP 1/16 OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) 6x CP 1/16 14 OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) 8x CP 1/16 18 OFDM (SISO) (PMP 450 Series) 1x 10 CP 1/16 10 CP 1/16 13 10 CP 1/16 26 10 CP 1/16 42 10 CP 1/16 55 20 CP 1/16 13 20 CP 1/16 30 20 CP 1/16 60 20 CP 1/16 98 20 CP 1/16 128 OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (SISO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450 Series) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 2x 4x 6x 8x 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x 1-59 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 21 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM Air Interface Rate Adapt Ch BW (MHz) Cyclic Prefix Maximum Aggregate Sector Throughput RF Link Test (Mbps) OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 1x CP 1/16 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 2x CP 1/16 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 3x CP 1/16 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 1x 10 CP 1/16 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 2x 10 CP 1/16 12 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 3x 10 CP 1/16 20 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 1x 20 CP 1/16 13 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 2x 20 CP 1/16 28 OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM) 3x 20 CP 1/16 48 Deployment scenario 1 – Replacing PMP 100 Equipment (20 MHz Channel Bandwidth) Deployment scenario 1 assumes that the existing network comprises of PMP 1x0 equipment (i.e. PMP 100, PMP 120, etc.) with the configuration listed below in Table 22. The migration in this scenario results in a complete replacement of PMP 1x0 series equipment with PMP 450 equipment. Scenario 1 assumes that neighbouring frequencies are free and that a guard band is not required at the edges of the spectrum used for transmission. Table 22 Deployment scenario 1 1-60 Term Definition Existing System Release 12.1 Existing Number of Sectors Existing Modulation FSK Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC Existing Ch BW (MHz) 20 Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) 84 Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 60 Existing Additional Frequencies Available (MHz) 10 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Term Definition Replace Legacy Subscribers with 450 SMs Required Resulting Number of Sectors Resulting Modulation OFDM (MIMO) Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC Resulting Ch BW (MHz) 20 Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 60 Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) 570 Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate Tower Throughput 679% Table 23 Scenario 1 spectrum usage Beginning frequency usage Resulting frequency usage (assuming no interference at band edges) 5725 5730 5735 5740 FSK (A) MIMO (A) 5.740 GHz FSK (B) MIMO (B) 5.760 GHz FSK (C) MIMO (C) 5.780 GHz 5745 5750 5755 5760 5765 5770 5775 5780 5785 5790 5795 5800 pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-61 PMP 450 Planning Guide Deployment scenario 1 migration procedure This procedure assumes that there are no temporary frequencies available and that the PMP 450 APs will replace the existing APs. Procedure 1a Deployment scenario 1 migration procedure 1-62 Identify proximity to potential system interferers by running a spectrum analysis scan where the PMP 450 equipment will be deployed. It is recommended to run this scan at several different times of day and night Record relevant AP and SM configuration parameters within the current operating network, if applicable, including: • authentication, and authorization parameters • frequency configuration • data network configuration • RF statistics • security configuration Configure the PMP 450 AP and SMs for deployment Install the PMP 450 AP Install the PMP 450 MIMO(frequency A) SMs – powered on Verify SM registration, link quality, and link performance. Continue installation for frequency B sector and frequency C sector. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Deployment scenario 2 – Replacing PMP 430 equipment (10 MHz Channel Bandwidth) Deployment scenario 2 assumes that the existing network is comprised of PMP 430 equipment with the configuration listed below in Table 24. The migration in this scenario results in a complete replacement of PMP 430 series equipment with PMP 450 equipment. Table 24 Deployment scenario 2 Term Definition Existing System Release 12.2.2 Existing Number of Sectors Existing Modulation OFDM Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC Existing Ch BW (MHz) 10 Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) 135 Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 30 Existing Additional Frequencies Available (MHz) Replace Legacy Subscribers with 450 SMs Optional (PMP 430 Interop enables PMP 430 SMs to register to PMP 450 AP) Resulting Number of Sectors Resulting Modulation OFDM (MIMO) Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC Resulting Ch BW (MHz) 10 Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 30 Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) 234 Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate Tower Throughput 173% pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-63 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 25 Deployment scenario 2 spectrum usage Beginning PMP 430 frequency usage Resulting PMP 450 frequency usage 5725 5730 5735 5740 OFDM (A) MIMO (A) 5.740 GHz OFDM (B) MIMO (B) 5.750 GHz OFDM (C) MIMO (C) 5.760 GHz 5745 5750 5755 5760 5765 5770 Deployment scenario 2 migration procedure This procedure assumes that there are no temporary frequencies available and that the PMP 450 APs will replace the existing APs. Procedure 2 Deployment scenario 2 migration procedure 1-64 Identify proximity to potential system interferers by running a spectrum analysis scan where the PMP 450 equipment will be deployed. It is recommended to run this scan at several different times of day and night Record relevant AP and SM configuration parameters within the current operating network, if applicable, including: • authentication, and authorization parameters • frequency configuration • data network configuration • RF statistics • security configuration Configure the PMP 450 AP and SMs for deployment Install the PMP 450 AP (frequency A) Install the PMP 450 MIMO (frequency A) SMs – powered on Verify SM registration, link quality, and link performance. Continue installation for frequency B sector and frequency C sector. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Site planning This section describes factors to be taken into account when choosing sites for the AP or SM, power supplies, CMM4 (if applicable) and GPS antenna (if applicable). AP or SM site selection When selecting a site for the AP or SM, consider the following factors: • Height and location to ensure that people are kept away from the antenna; see Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 3-14. • Height and location to achieve the best radio path. • Ability to meet the requirements specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 1-107. • Aesthetics and planning permission issues. • Cable lengths; see Maximum cable lengths on page 1-65. • The effect of strong winds on the installation; see Wind loading on page 1-66. Power supply site selection When selecting a site for the AP or SM power supply, consider the following factors: • Indoor location with no possibility of condensation. • Availability of a mains electricity supply. • Accessibility for viewing status indicator LED and connecting Ethernet cables. • Cable lengths; see Maximum cable lengths on page 1-65. Maximum cable lengths When installing PMP 450 Series APs or SMs, the maximum permitted length of the shielded copper Ethernet interface cable is 330 feet (100m) from AP/SM to their associated power supplies or CMM4. When receiving synchronization signalling from a UGPS module, see table below for maximum synchronization cable lengths. Table 26 Sync cable length specification Configuration Maximum Cable Length (feet) Maximum Cable Length (meters) UGPS powered via external power source 330 100 UGPS powered via PMP 450 AP (via AP sync port) 130 40 pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-65 PMP 450 Planning Guide Wind loading Ensure that the site will not be prone to excessive wind loading. Antennas and equipment mounted on towers or buildings will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral forces when there is appreciable wind. Antennas are normally specified by the amount of force (in pounds) for specific wind strengths. The magnitude of the force depends on both the wind strength and size of the antenna. Calculation of lateral force (metric) The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from: Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2 Where: Is: surface area in square meters wind speed in meters per second The lateral force produced by a single PMP 450 at different wind speeds is shown in Table 27 Lateral force - metric and Table 28 Lateral force - US. Table 27 Lateral force - metric Largest surface area (square meters) 1-66 Lateral force (Kg) at wind speed (meters per second) 30 40 50 60 70 .066 (AP – 5 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 11 17 25 34 .083 (AP – 5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 14 22 31 43 .27 (AP – 2.4 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 25 45 71 102 138 .088 (AP – 3.5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 14 22 33 45 .088 (AP – 3.6 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 14 22 33 45 .0027 (SM) 0.25 0.45 0.7 1.4 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Calculation of lateral force (US) The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from: Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2 Where: Is: surface area in square feet wind speed in miles per hour The lateral force produced by a single PMP 450 unit at different wind speeds is shown in Table 28. Table 28 Lateral force - US Largest surface area (square feet) Lateral force (lb) at wind speed (miles per hour) 80 100 120 140 150 0.71 (AP – 5 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 19 30 43 58 67 0.89 (AP – 5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 24 37 54 73 84 2.9 (AP – 2.4 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 78 122 175 239 274 0.94 (AP – 3.5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 25 40 57 77 89 0.94 (AP – 3.6 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 25 40 57 77 89 0.29 (SM) 7.8 12 18 23 27 Capabilities of the PMP 450 Series The structure and mounting brackets of the AP are capable of withstanding wind speeds up to: • 190 kph (118 mph) – 5 GHz Sector Antennas • 216 kph (135 mph) – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Sector Antennas Ensure that the structure to which the AP is fixed to is also capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds and loads. The structure and mounting brackets of the SM are capable of withstanding wind speeds up to 190 kph (118 mph). Ensure that the structure to which the SM is fixed to is also capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds and loads. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-67 PMP 450 Planning Guide Wind speed statistics Contact the national meteorological office for the country concerned to identify the likely wind speeds prevalent at the proposed location. Use this data to estimate the total wind loading on the support structures. Sources of information: 1-68 • US National Weather Service, http://www.nws.noaa.gov/ • UK Meteorological Office, www.meto.gov.uk pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Link planning This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, obstacles, path loss and throughput. Range and obstacles Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance. Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and to assess the risk of interference. This information is necessary in order to achieve an accurate link feasibility assessment. The PMP 450 Series is designed to operate in Near-Line-of-Sight (nLOS), Non-Line-of-Sight (NLOS) and Line-ofSight (LOS) environments. An NLOS environment is one in which there is no optical line-of-sight, that is, there are obstructions between the antennas. See Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram. OFDM technology can often use multi-pathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in cases where the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends to help especially when obstacles are near the middle of the link, and less so when the obstacles are very near the SM or AP. However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4 GHz, and 5.8 GHz frequency bands. Even with OFDM, these products should not be expected to penetrate walls or extensive trees and foliage. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-69 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 29 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO-B 16QAM-MIMO-B 64QAM-MIMO-B 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 8.5 mi / 13.6 km 6 mi / 9.6 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 7.7 mi / 12.32 km 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 15.2 mi / 24.32 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.9 mi / 7.84 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 30.3 mi / 48.48 km 13.7 mi / 21.92 km 5.6 mi / 8.96 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Integrated SM antenna 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 13.5 mi / 21.6 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 1.8 mi / 2.88 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 8.5 mi / 13.6 km 6 mi / 9.6 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 7.7 mi / 12.32 km 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.6 mi / 12.16 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.8GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 5.8GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.8GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-70 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 30 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.8GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 5.8GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.8GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) with Integrated SM antenna with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM capability with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM capability with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM capability with Integrated SM antenna with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM capability with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM capability with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM capability with Integrated SM antenna with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM capability with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM capability with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM capability with Integrated SM antenna with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM capability with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM capability with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM capability pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x 256QAMMIMO-B 0.5 mi / 0.8 km QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO-B 16QAM-MIMO-B 64QAM-MIMO-B 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 8.3 mi / 13.28 km 3.6 mi / 5.76 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 32.9 mi / 52.64 km 23.3 mi / 37.28 km 10.3 mi / 16.48 km 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 20.7 mi / 33.12 km 14.7 mi / 23.52 km 6.5 mi / 10.4 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 18.3 mi / 29.28 km 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 6.6 mi / 10.56 km 4.6 mi / 7.36 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 18.5 mi / 29.6 km 13.1 mi / 20.96 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 8.3 mi / 13.28 km 3.6 mi / 5.76 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 32.9 mi / 52.64 km 23.3 mi / 37.28 km 10.3 mi / 16.48 km 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 1.8 mi / 2.88 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 3.7 mi / 5.92 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 10.4 mi / 16.64 km 7.4 mi / 11.84 km 3.2 mi / 5.12 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 1.8 mi / 2.88 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 3.3 mi / 5.28 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 1-71 PMP 450 Planning Guide 1-72 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 31 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO-B 16QAM-MIMO-B 64QAM-MIMO-B 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 14.5 mi / 23.2 km 10.3 mi / 16.48 km 5.1 mi / 8.16 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 28.9 mi / 46.24 km 14.3 mi / 22.88 km 6.3 mi / 10.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 25.8 mi / 41.28 km 18.3 mi / 29.28 km 9 mi / 14.4 km 4 mi / 6.4 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 25.5 mi / 40.8 km 11.3 mi / 18.08 km 3 mi / 4.8 km with Integrated SM antenna 8.2 mi / 13.12 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 23 mi / 36.8 km 16.3 mi / 26.08 km 8.1 mi / 12.96 km 3.6 mi / 5.76 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 14.5 mi / 23.2 km 10.3 mi / 16.48 km 5.1 mi / 8.16 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 28.9 mi / 46.24 km 14.3 mi / 22.88 km 6.3 mi / 10.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.8 mi / 2.88 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 5.1 mi / 8.16 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 4.6 mi / 7.36 km 3.2 mi / 5.12 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 12.9 mi / 20.64 km 9.2 mi / 14.72 km 4.5 mi / 7.2 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.8GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 5.8GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.8GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-73 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 32 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO-B 16QAM-MIMOB 64QAM-MIMOB 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 8.2 mi / 13.12 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 8.2 mi / 13.12 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 8.2 mi / 13.12 km 5.8 mi / 9.28 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.6 mi / 7.36 km 3.3 mi / 5.28 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 4.6 mi / 7.36 km 3.3 mi / 5.28 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.6 mi / 7.36 km 3.3 mi / 5.28 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 ***** 5.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) ***** Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. 1-74 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 33 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO-B 16QAM-MIMOB 64QAM-MIMOB 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 5.3 mi / 8.48 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 5.3 mi / 8.48 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 5.3 mi / 8.48 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 ††††† 5.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) ††††† Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-75 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 34 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x QPSK-SISO QPSK-MIMO-B 16QAM-MIMOB 64QAM-MIMOB 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 4 mi / 6.4 km 2.8 mi / 4.48 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 5.2 mi / 8.32 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 7.1 mi / 11.36 km 5 mi / 8 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 5.2 mi / 8.32 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.3 mi / 3.68 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 4 mi / 6.4 km 2.8 mi / 4.48 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 ‡‡‡‡‡ 5.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) ‡‡‡‡‡ 1-76 Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 35 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 2.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 2.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 2.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 2.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 15.2 mi / 24.32 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 8.6 mi / 13.76 km 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 34.1 mi / 54.56 km 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 12.1 mi / 19.36 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-77 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 36 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 2.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 2.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 2.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 2.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-78 QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 17.1 mi / 27.36 km 7.3 mi / 11.68 km 3.6 mi / 5.76 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 29 mi / 46.4 km 14.4 mi / 23.04 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km with Integrated SM antenna 13.6 mi / 21.76 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.1 mi / 6.56 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 38.2 mi / 61.12 km 16.3 mi / 26.08 km 8.1 mi / 12.96 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km with Integrated SM antenna 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 17.1 mi / 27.36 km 12.1 mi / 19.36 km 5.2 mi / 8.32 km 2.6 mi / 4.16 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 37 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 2.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 2.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 2.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 2.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 27.1 mi / 43.36 km 19.2 mi / 30.72 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 17.1 mi / 27.36 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km with Integrated SM antenna 15.2 mi / 24.32 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 3 mi / 4.8 km with Integrated SM antenna 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 19.2 mi / 30.72 km 13.6 mi / 21.76 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 12 dB to SM Range 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-79 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 38 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 3.5GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) PMP 450 3.5GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) 3.5GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 3.5GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-80 QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 6.7 mi / 10.72 km 6.7 mi / 10.72 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 23.8 mi / 38.08 km 23.8 mi / 38.08 km 12.1 mi / 19.36 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 39 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 3.5GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) PMP 450 3.5GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) 3.5GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 3.5GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 6.9 mi / 11.04 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 24.6 mi / 39.36 km 12.5 mi / 20 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 9.7 mi / 15.52 km 9.7 mi / 15.52 km 3.9 mi / 6.24 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 34.3 mi / 54.88 km 34.3 mi / 54.88 km 13.8 mi / 22.08 km 7 mi / 11.2 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with Integrated SM antenna 1 mi / 1.6 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-81 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 40 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 3.5GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) PMP 450 3.5GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) 3.5GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 3.5GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-82 QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 10.7 mi / 17.12 km 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 38 mi / 60.8 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 6.6 mi / 10.56 km with Integrated SM antenna 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 6 mi / 9.6 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.4 mi / 34.24 km 9.5 mi / 15.2 km 3.7 mi / 5.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.7 mi / 5.92 km 3.7 mi / 5.92 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 13.2 mi / 21.12 km 13.2 mi / 21.12 km 6.8 mi / 10.88 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 41 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 3.6GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) PMP 450 3.6GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) 3.6GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 3.6GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 11.9 mi / 19.04 km 6.1 mi / 9.76 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 6.7 mi / 10.72 km 6.7 mi / 10.72 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 23.8 mi / 38.08 km 23.8 mi / 38.08 km 12.1 mi / 19.36 km 5.4 mi / 8.64 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-83 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 42 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 3.6GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) PMP 450 3.6GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) 3.6GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 3.6GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-84 QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 17.2 mi / 27.52 km 6.9 mi / 11.04 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 24.6 mi / 39.36 km 12.5 mi / 20 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 9.7 mi / 15.52 km 9.7 mi / 15.52 km 3.9 mi / 6.24 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 34.3 mi / 54.88 km 34.3 mi / 54.88 km 13.8 mi / 22.08 km 7 mi / 11.2 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with Integrated SM antenna 1 mi / 1.6 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 43 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x Modulation 3.6GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) PMP 450 3.6GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) 3.6GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 3.6GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) QPSK-SISO 2x QPSKMIMO-B 4x 16QAMMIMO-B 6x 64QAMMIMO-B 8x 256QAMMIMO-B with Integrated SM antenna 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 20.9 mi / 33.44 km 10.7 mi / 17.12 km 4.8 mi / 7.68 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 38 mi / 60.8 km 17 mi / 27.2 km 6.6 mi / 10.56 km with Integrated SM antenna 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 11.7 mi / 18.72 km 6 mi / 9.6 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 21.4 mi / 34.24 km 9.5 mi / 15.2 km 3.7 mi / 5.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.7 mi / 5.92 km 3.7 mi / 5.92 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 13.2 mi / 21.12 km 13.2 mi / 21.12 km 6.8 mi / 10.88 km 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 11 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 1 mi / 1.6 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-85 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 44 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x QPSK-SISO 2x 16-QAM-SISO 3x 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 9.9 mi / 15.84 km 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 24.8 mi / 39.68 km 11.1 mi / 17.76 km 4.2 mi / 6.72 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 19.7 mi / 31.52 km 8.8 mi / 14.08 km 3.3 mi / 5.28 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 24.8 mi / 39.68 km 9.3 mi / 14.88 km with Integrated SM antenna 5.5 mi / 8.8 km 2.5 mi / 4 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 13.9 mi / 22.24 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km 2.3 mi / 3.68 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 11.1 mi / 17.76 km 4.9 mi / 7.84 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 31.2 mi / 49.92 km 13.9 mi / 22.24 km 5.2 mi / 8.32 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.8 mi / 2.88 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 9.9 mi / 15.84 km 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 3.1 mi / 4.96 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.8GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 AP PMP 430 SM 5.8GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.8GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-86 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 45 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x 2x 3x QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 12.4 mi / 19.84 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 31.2 mi / 49.92 km 15.6 mi / 24.96 km 6 mi / 9.6 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 24.8 mi / 39.68 km 12.4 mi / 19.84 km 4.8 mi / 7.68 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 35 mi / 56 km 13.5 mi / 21.6 km with Integrated SM antenna 7 mi / 11.2 km 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.3 mi / 2.08 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 17.5 mi / 28 km 8.8 mi / 14.08 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 13.9 mi / 22.24 km 7 mi / 11.2 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 39.3 mi / 62.88 km 19.7 mi / 31.52 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km with Integrated SM antenna 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 5.5 mi / 8.8 km 2.8 mi / 4.48 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 4.4 mi / 7.04 km 2.2 mi / 3.52 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 12.4 mi / 19.84 km 6.2 mi / 9.92 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 1.8 mi / 2.88 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 3.9 mi / 6.24 km 2 mi / 3.2 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.8GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 AP PMP 430 SM 5.8GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.8GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-87 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 46 Link budget details – 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x QPSK-SISO 2x 16-QAM-SISO 3x 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 19.1 mi / 30.56 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km 3 mi / 4.8 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 19.1 mi / 30.56 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 38.2 mi / 61.12 km 15.2 mi / 24.32 km 6 mi / 9.6 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 40 mi / 64 km 17 mi / 27.2 km with Integrated SM antenna 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 27 mi / 43.2 km 10.8 mi / 17.28 km 4.3 mi / 6.88 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 21.5 mi / 34.4 km 8.5 mi / 13.6 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 40 mi / 64 km 24.1 mi / 38.56 km 9.6 mi / 15.36 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 8.5 mi / 13.6 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.4 mi / 2.24 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 6.8 mi / 10.88 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 19.1 mi / 30.56 km 7.6 mi / 12.16 km 3 mi / 4.8 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 9 dB to SM Range 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.4 mi / 0.64 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 6 mi / 9.6 km 2.4 mi / 3.84 km 1 mi / 1.6 km Modulation 5.8GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.8GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 AP PMP 430 SM 5.8GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.8GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) 1-88 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 47 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x QPSK-SISO 2x 16-QAM-SISO 3x 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 6.3 mi / 10.08 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.7 mi / 2.72 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.5 mi / 5.6 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 2.1 mi / 3.36 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.1 mi / 1.76 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.7 mi / 1.12 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 AP §§§§§ PMP 430 SM 5.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) §§§§§ Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-89 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 48 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x QPSK-SISO 2x 16-QAM-SISO 3x 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 5.3 mi / 8.48 km 2.7 mi / 4.32 km 1 mi / 1.6 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with Integrated SM antenna 3 mi / 4.8 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.9 mi / 1.44 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.3 mi / 0.48 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 AP ****** PMP 430 SM 5.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) ****** 1-90 Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 49 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel Bandwidth Product Range Details Parameter 1x QPSK-SISO 2x 16-QAM-SISO 3x 64-QAM-SISO with Integrated SM antenna 6.7 mi / 10.72 km 2.9 mi / 4.64 km 0.9 mi / 1.44 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 7.5 mi / 12 km 3.4 mi / 5.44 km 1.5 mi / 2.4 km with Integrated SM antenna 3.8 mi / 6.08 km 1.6 mi / 2.56 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 4.2 mi / 6.72 km 1.9 mi / 3.04 km 0.8 mi / 1.28 km with Integrated SM antenna 1.2 mi / 1.92 km 0.5 mi / 0.8 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 1.3 mi / 2.08 km 0.6 mi / 0.96 km 0.3 mi / 0.48 km with Integrated SM antenna 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with CLIP that adds 8 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with LENS that adds 5.5 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km with Reflector Dish that adds 14 dB to SM Range 0.4 mi / 0.64 km 0.2 mi / 0.32 km 0.1 mi / 0.16 km Modulation 5.4GHz Max. LOS Link Budget (no fade margin) 5.4GHz Max. nLOS Link Budget (additional 5 dB link loss) PMP 450 AP †††††† PMP 430 SM 5.4GHz Max. NLOS1 Link Budget (additional 15 dB link loss) 5.4GHz Max. NLOS2 Link Budget (additional 25 dB link loss) †††††† Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-91 PMP 450 Planning Guide Path loss considerations Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of the link. Calculating path loss The path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way (Free Space Path Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss) and a margin to allow for possible fading of the radio signal (Fade Margin). The following calculation needs to be performed to judge whether a particular link can be installed: L free _ space + Lexcess + L fade + Lseasonal < Lcapability Where: Is: L free _ space Free Space Path Loss (dB) Lexcess Excess Path Loss (dB) L fade Fade Margin Required (dB) Lseasonal Seasonal Fading (dB) Lcapability Equipment Capability (dB) Calculating maximum power level for connectorized AP units If a connectorized PMP 450 AP is to be installed in a country that imposes an EIRP limit in the selected band, calculate the highest setting of Maximum Power Level that will be permitted using this formula: Maximum Power Level (dBm) = Allowed EIRP (dBm) – Antenna Gain (dBi) + Cable Loss (dB) Where: Is: Maximum Power Level (dBm) the highest permissible setting of the transmitter output power, Allowed EIRP (dBm) the EIRP limit allowed by the regulations, Antenna Gain (dBi) the gain of the chosen antenna, Cable Loss (dB) the loss of the RF cable connecting the AP to the antenna. For more information on EIRP limits, see Compliance with radio regulations on page 3-17. Understanding Attenuation An RF signal in space is attenuated by atmospheric and other effects as a function of the distance from the initial transmission point. The further a reception point is placed from the transmission point, the weaker is the received RF signal. 1-92 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Calculating Link Loss The link loss is the total attenuation of the wireless signal between two point-to-multipoint units. The link loss calculation is presented below: Link Loss (dB) = Transmit power of the remote wireless unit (dBm) − Tx Cable loss (dB) − Received power at the local unit (dBm) – Rx cable loss (dB) + Antenna gain at the remote unit (dBi) + Antenna gain at the local unit (dBi) Calculating Rx Signal Level The Rx sensitivity of each module is provided at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com. The determinants in Rx signal level are illustrated in Figure 17. Figure 17 Determinants in Rx signal level Rx signal level is calculated as follows: Rx signal level dB = Tx power − Tx cable loss + Tx antenna gain − free space path loss + Rx antenna gain − Rx cable loss This Rx signal level calculation presumes that a clear line of sight is established between the transmitter and receiver and that no objects encroach in the Fresnel zone. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-93 PMP 450 Planning Guide Calculating Fade Margin Free space path loss is a major determinant in Rx (received) signal level. Rx signal level, in turn, is a major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as follows: system operating margin (fade margin) dB =Rx signal level dB − Rx sensitivity dB Thus, fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is characteristic of a more reliable link. Analyzing the RF Environment An essential element in RF network planning is the analysis of spectrum usage and the strength of the signals that occupy the spectrum you are planning to use. Regardless of how you measure and log or chart the results you find (through the Spectrum Analyzer in SM feature or by using a spectrum analyzer), you should do so: • at various times of day. • on various days of the week. • periodically into the future. As new RF neighbors move in or consumer devices in your spectrum proliferate, this will keep you aware of the dynamic possibilities for interference with your network. Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies These modules allow you to • use an SM or an AP that is temporarily transformed into an SM, as a spectrum analyzer. • view a graphical display that shows power level in RSSI and dBm at 5-MHz increments throughout the frequency band range, regardless of limited selections in the Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter of the SM. • select an AP channel that minimizes interference from other RF equipment. The following procedure causes the SM to drop any active RF link. If a link is dropped when the spectrum analysis begins, the link can be re-established when either a 15-minute interval has elapsed or the spectrum analyzer feature is disabled. 1-94 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Analyzing the spectrum To use the built-in spectrum analyzer functionality of the SM (or AP that is temporarily configured as an SM for spectrum analysis via the AP’s GUI) proceed as follows: Procedure 3 Analyzing the spectrum Predetermine a power source and interface that will work for the SM in the area you want to analyze. Take the SM, power source, and interface device to the area. Access the Tools web page of the SM. Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis After 10 seconds, the results are displayed: Travel to another location in the area. Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis Repeat Steps 6 and 7 until the area has been adequately scanned and logged. As with any other data that pertains to your business, a decision today to put the data into a retrievable database may grow in value to you over time. The Spectrum Analyzer contains configurable parameters to fit your business requirements. See the PMP 450 Operations Guide for further information. Wherever you find the measured noise level is greater than the sensitivity of the radio that you plan to deploy, use the noise level (rather than the link budget) for your link feasibility calculations. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-95 PMP 450 Planning Guide Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves In the signal path, any object that is larger than the wavelength of the signal can reflect the signal. Such an object can even be the surface of the earth or of a river, bay, or lake. The wavelength of the signal is approximately • 2 inches for 2.4, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4-GHz and 5.8-GHz signals. A reflected signal can arrive at the antenna of the receiver later than the non-reflected signal arrives. These two or more signals cause the condition known as multipath. Multipath may increase or decrease the signal level and so overall attenuation may be higher or lower than that caused by the link distance. This is problematic at the margin of the link budget, where the standard operating margin (fade margin) may be compromised. Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone The Fresnel (pronounced fre∙NEL) Zone is a three-dimensional volume around the line of sight of an antenna transmission. Objects that penetrate this area can cause the received strength of the transmitted signal to fade. Outof-phase reflections and absorption of the signal result in signal cancellation. The foliage of trees and plants in the Fresnel Zone can cause signal loss. Seasonal density, moisture content of the foliage, and other factors such as wind may change the amount of loss. Plan to perform frequent and regular link tests if you must transmit though foliage. 1-96 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as shown below. However, this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate a different pattern of channel assignments. Figure 18 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors An example for assignment of frequency channels is provided in the following table. See section Network migration planning on page 1-56 for more information on migrating to a PMP 450 network. Table 50 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector Symbol Frequency 5.740 GHz 5.760 GHz 5.780 GHz 5.800 GHz pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-97 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 19 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors An example for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs is provided in the following table. See section Network migration planning on page 1-56 for more information on migrating to a PMP 450 network. Table 51 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector 1-98 Symbol Frequency 5.740 GHz 5.760 GHz 5.780 GHz pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool The first step to avoid interference in wireless systems is to set all APs to receive timing from a synchronization source (Cluster Management Module, or Universal Global Positioning System). This ensures that the modules are in sync and start transmitting at the same time each frame. The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all APs of the same frequency band in proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all stop transmitting each frame before any start receiving). This avoids the problem of one AP attempting to receive the signal from a distant SM while a nearby AP transmits, which could overpower that signal. The following parameters on the AP determine the transmit/receive ratio: • Max Range • Downlink Data percentage • (reserved) Control Slots If OFDM (PMP 430, PMP 450, PTP 230) and FSK (PMP 1x0) APs of the same frequency band are in proximity, or if you want APs set to different parameters (differing in their Max Range values, for example), then you should use the Frame Calculator to identify compatible settings. The frame calculator is available on the Frame Calculator tab of the Tools web page. To use the Frame Calculator, type into the calculator various configurable parameter values for each proximal AP, and then record the resulting AP Receive Start value. Next vary the Downlink Data percentage in each calculation and iterate until the calculated AP Receive Start for all collocated APs are within 300 bit times; if possible, within 150 bit times. In Cambium Point-to-Multipoint systems, 10 bit times = 1 µs. The calculator does not use values in the module or populate its parameters. It is merely a convenience application that runs on a module. For this reason, you can use any FSK module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to perform FSK frame calculations for setting the parameters on an FSK AP and any OFDM module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to perform OFDM frame calculations for setting the parameters on an OFDM AP. IMPORTANT! APs that have slightly mismatched transmit-to-receive ratios and low levels of data traffic may see little effect on throughput. A system that was not tuned for co-location may work fine at low traffic levels, but encounter problems at higher traffic levels. The conservative practice is to tune for co-location before traffic ultimately increases. This prevents problems that occur as sectors are built. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-99 PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 20 OFDM Frame Calculator tab In the Frame Calculator tab, you can set the following parameters. Table 52 OFDM Frame Calculator tab attributes 1-100 Attribute Meaning Link Mode For AP to SM frame calculations, select Multipoint Link Platform Type AP/BHM Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the AP. Platform Type SM/BHS Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the SM. Channel Bandwidth Set this to the channel bandwidth used in the AP. Cyclic Prefix Set this to the cyclic prefix used in the AP. Max Range Set to the same value as the Max Range parameter is set in the AP(s). Air Delay This field should be left at the default of 0 ns. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Attribute Meaning Downlink Data Initially set this parameter to the same value that the AP has for its Downlink Data parameter (percentage). Then, as you use the Frame Calculator tool in Procedure 4, you will vary the value in this parameter to find the proper value to write into the Downlink Data parameter of all APs in the cluster. PMP 450 Series APs offer a range of 15% to 85%, and default to 75%. The value that you set in this parameter has the following interaction with the value of the Max Range parameter (above): The default Max Range value is 5 miles and, at that distance, the maximum Downlink Data value (85% in PMP450) is functional. Control Slots Set this parameter to the value of the Control Slot parameter is set in the APs. The Calculated Frame Results display several items of interest: Table 53 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes Attribute Meaning Modulation The type of radio modulation used in the calculation (OFDM for PMP 450) Total Frame Bits The total number of bits used in the calculated frames Data Slots (Down/Up) This field is based on the Downlink Data setting. For example, a result within the typical range for a Downlink Data setting of 75% is 61/21, meaning 61 data slots down and 21 data slots up. Round Trip Air Delay (MaxRange) This is the roundtrip air delay in bit times for the Max Range value set in the calculator Approximate distance (MaxRange) The Max Range value used for frame calculation AP Transmit End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP ceases transmission. AP Receive Start In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP is ready to receive transmission from the SM. AP Receive End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP will cease receiving transmission from the SM. SM Receive End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM will cease receiving transmission from the AP. SM Transmit Start In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM will begin transmission. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-101 PMP 450 Planning Guide To use the Frame Calculator to ensure that all APs are configured to transmit and receive at the same time, follow the procedure below: Procedure 4 Using the Frame Calculator Populate the OFDM Frame Calculator parameters with appropriate values as described above. Click the Calculate button. Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section Record the value of the AP Receive Start field Enter a parameter set from another AP in the system – for example, an AP in the same cluster that has a higher Max Range value configured. Click the Calculate button. Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are within 150 bit times of each other, skip to step 10. If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are not within 150 bit times of each other, modify the Downlink Data parameter until the calculated results for AP Receive Start are within 300 bit time of each other, if possible, 150 bit time. 10 Access the Radio tab in the Configuration web page of each AP in the cluster and change its Downlink Data parameter (percentage) to the last value that was used in the Frame Calculator. Selecting Sites for Network Elements The APs must be positioned 1-102 • with hardware that the wind and ambient vibrations cannot flex or move. • where a tower or rooftop is available or can be erected. • where a grounding system is available. • with lightning arrestors to transport lightning strikes away from equipment. • at a proper height: o higher than the tallest points of objects immediately around them (such as trees, buildings, and tower legs). o at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) below the tallest point on the tower, pole, or roof (for lightning protection). • away from high-RF energy sites (such as AM or FM stations, high-powered antennas, and live AM radio towers). • in line-of-sight paths o to the SMs. o that will not be obstructed by trees as they grow or structures that are later built. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Visual line of sight does not guarantee radio line of sight. Surveying Sites Factors to survey at potential sites include • what pre-existing wireless equipment exists at the site. (Perform spectrum analysis.) • whether available mounting positions exist near the lowest elevation that satisfies line of site, coverage, and other link criteria. • whether you will always have the right to decide who climbs the tower to install and maintain your equipment, and whether that person or company can climb at any hour of any day. • whether you will have collaborative rights and veto power to prevent interference to your equipment from wireless equipment that is installed at the site in the future. • whether a pre-existing grounding system (path to Protective Earth ) exists, and what is required to establish a path to it. • who is permitted to run any indoor lengths of cable. Clearing the Radio Horizon Because the surface of the earth is curved, higher module elevations are required for greater link distances. This effect can be critical to link connectivity in link spans that are greater than 8 miles (12 km). To use metric units to find the minimum height required to reach the radio horizon use the following equation: Radio horizon distance (km) = 4.12 (SQRT(h1) + SQRT(h2)) Where: Is: h1 height of the AP h2 height of the SM To use English standard units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula: Radio horizon distance (km) = 1.42 (SQRT(h1) + SQRT(h2)) Where: Is: h1 height of the AP h2 height of the SM pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-103 PMP 450 Planning Guide Calculating the Aim Angles The proper angle of tilt can be calculated as a factor of both the difference in elevation and the distance that the link spans. Even in this case, a plumb line and a protractor can be helpful to ensure the proper tilt. This tilt is typically minimal. The number of degrees to offset (from vertical) the mounting hardware leg of the support tube is equal to the angle of elevation from the lower module to the higher module ( VLAN web page of the AP. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a default EtherType of 0x88a8 in addition to four alternate EtherTypes that can be configured to aid in interoperability with existing networks that use a different EtherType than the default. The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top level concept, this operates on the outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag on or “popping” a tag off. This means packets will at most transition from an 802.1Q frame to an 801.ad frame (with a tag “pushed” on) or an untagged 802.1 frame (with the tag “popped” off. Similarly, for an 802.1ad frame, this can only transition from an 802.1ad frame to an 802.1Q frame (with the tag “popped” off) since the radio software only supports 2 levels of tags. 1-126 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Security planning This section describes how to plan for PMP 450 networks to operate in secure mode. Isolating APs from the Internet Ensure that the IP addresses of the APs in your network • are not routable over the Internet. • do not share the subnet of the IP address of your user. RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Subnets, reserves for private IP networks three blocks of IP addresses that are not routable over the Internet: • /8 subnets have one reserved network, 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255. • /16 subnets have 16 reserved networks, 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255. • /24 subnets have 256 reserved networks, 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255. Managing module access by passwords Adding a user for access to a module From the factory, each module has a preconfigured administrator-level account in the name root, which initially requires no associated password. This is the same root account that you may have used for access to the module by ftp. When you upgrade a module • an account is created in the name admin. • both admin and root inherit the password that was previously used for access to the module: o the Full Access password, if one was set. o the Display-Only Access password, if one was set and no Full Access password was set. If you use Wireless Manager, do not delete the root account from any module. If you use an NMS that communicates with modules through SNMP, do not delete the root account from any module unless you first can confirm that the NMS does not rely on the root account for access to the modules. Each module supports four or fewer user accounts, regardless of account levels. The available levels are • ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates. • INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user. • TECHNICIAN, who pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-127 PMP 450 Planning Guide • GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin account at the ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using the Account => Change Users Password tab. (If you configure only one of these, then the other will still require no password for access into it and thus remain a security risk.) If you are intent on configuring only one of them, delete the admin account. The root account is the only account that CNUT uses to update the module. After a password has been set for any ADMINISTRATOR-level account, initial access to the module GUI opens the view of GUEST level. Table 57 Identity-based user account permissions - AP Menu Option Menu Tab ADMIN INSTALLER TECH Home General Status Session Status Remote Subscribers Event Log Network Interface Layer2 Neighbors Configuration General IP Radio SNMP Quality of Service (QoS) Security Time VLAN VLAN Membership DiffServ Protocol Filtering Port Configuration Syslog Unit Settings Statistics Scheduler SM Registration Failures Bridge Control Block Bridging Table Ethernet Radio VLAN Data VC Throughput 1-128 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Tools Accounts Quick Start Copyright Logoff Filter ARP Overload DHCP Relay Pass Through Statistics DNS Statistics Link Capacity Test OFDM Frame Calculator Subscriber Configuration Link Status Remote Spectrum Analyzer Sessions DNS Test AP Sessions AP Authentication State Machine Log AP Authorization State Machine Log EAP Radius Log User Authentication And Access Tracking Change User Password Add User Delete User Quick Start Region Settings Radio Carrier Frequency Synchronization LAN IP Address Review and Save Configuration Copyright Notices pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-129 PMP 450 Planning Guide Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - SM Menu Menu Tab ADMIN INSTALLER TECH Home General Status Event Log Network Interface Layer2 Neighbors Configuration General IP Radio SNMP Quality of Service (QoS) Security VLAN VLAN Membership DiffServ Protocol Filtering Port Configuration NAT PPPoE NAT Port Mapping Syslog Unit Settings Statistics Scheduler Bridge Control Block Bridging Table Translation Table Ethernet Radio VLAN Data VC Filter NAT Stats NAT DHCP ARP Overload PPPoE Statistics Peer Statistics DNS Statistics Syslog Statistics 1-130 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Tools Logs Accounts PDA Copyright Logoff Spectrum Analyzer Alignment Link Capacity Test AP Evaluation OFDM Frame Calculator BER Results Alignment Tool Link Status DNS Test NAT Table SM Session SM Authentication SM Authorization PPPoE Session Log EAP Radius Log User Authentication and Access Tracking Change User Password Add User Delete User Quick Status Spectrum Results (PDA) Information AP Evaluation AIM Copyright Notices Filtering protocols and ports You can filter (block) specified protocols and ports from leaving the AP and SM and entering the network. This protects the network from both intended and inadvertent packet loading or probing by network users. By keeping the specified protocols or ports off the network, this feature also provides a level of protection to users from each other. Protocol and port filtering is set per AP/SM. Except for filtering of SNMP ports, filtering occurs as packets leave the AP/SM. If an SM is configured to filter SNMP, then SNMP packets are blocked from entering the SM and, thereby, from interacting with the SNMP portion of the protocol stack on the SM. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-131 PMP 450 Planning Guide Port Filtering with NAT Enabled Where NAT is enabled on the SM, you can filter only the three user-defined ports. The following are example situations in which you can configure port filtering where NAT is enabled. • To block a subscriber from using FTP, you can filter Ports 20 and 21 (the FTP ports) for both the TCP and UDP protocols. • To block a subscriber from access to SNMP, you can filter Ports 161 and 162 (the SNMP ports) for both the TCP and UDP protocols. NOTE: In only the SNMP case, filtering occurs before the packet interacts with the protocol stack. Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled Where NAT is disabled on the SM, you can filter both protocols and the three user-defined ports. Using the check boxes on the interface, you can either • allow all protocols except those that you wish to block. • block all protocols except those that you wish to allow. You can allow or block any of the following protocols: 1-132 • PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) • Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols: o SMB (Network Neighborhood) o SNMP o Up to 3 user-defined ports o All other IPv4 traffic (see Figure 32) o Uplink Broadcast o ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) o All others (see Figure 32) pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Figure 32 Categorical protocol filtering BootP Server BootP Client IPv4 Multica st SNMP All Other IPv4 User Defined Port 1 SMB User Defined Port 2 User Defined Port 3 ARP PPPoE All Others The following are example situations in which you can configure protocol filtering where NAT is disabled: • If you block a subscriber from only PPoE and SNMP, then the subscriber retains access to all other protocols and all ports. • If you block PPoE, IPv4, and Uplink Broadcast, and you also check the All others selection, then only Address Resolution Protocol is not filtered. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-133 PMP 450 Planning Guide The ports that are filtered as a result of protocol selections in the Protocol Filtering tab of the SM are listed in Table 59. Table 59 Ports filtered per protocol selections Protocol Selected Port Filtered (Blocked) SMB Destination Ports 137 TCP and UDP, 138 UDP, 139 TCP, 445 TCP SNMP Destination Ports 161 TCP and UDP, 162 TCP and UDP Bootp Client Source Port 68 UDP Bootp Server Source Port 67 UDP Port Lockdown Cambium devices support access to various communication protocols and only the ports required for these protocols are available for access by external entities. Operators may change the port numbers for these protocols via the radio GUI or SNMP. Table 60 Device default port numbers Port Usage Port Usage Device 21 FTP Listen Port AP, SM 80 HTTP Listen Port AP, SM 1812 Standard RADIUS port Destination Port AP 1813 Standard RADIUS accounting port Destination Port AP, SM 161 SNMP port Listen Port AP, SM 162 SNMP trap port Destination Port AP, SM 514 Syslog Destination Port AP, SM Isolating SMs In an AP, you can prevent SMs in the sector from directly communicating with each other. In CMMmicro Release 2.2 or later and the CMM4, you can prevent connected APs from directly communicating with each other, which prevents SMs that are in different sectors of a cluster from communicating with each other. In the AP, the SM Isolation parameter is available in the General tab of the Configuration web page. In the dropdown menu for that parameter, you can configure the SM Isolation feature by any of the following selections: 1-134 • Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication between SMs. • Block SM Packets from being forwarded. This prevents both multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide • Block and Forward SM Packets to Backbone. This not only prevents multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-toSM communication but also sends the packets, which otherwise would have been handled SM to SM, through the Ethernet port of the AP. In the CMMmicro and the CMM4, SM isolation treatment is the result of how you choose to manage the port-based VLAN feature of the embedded switch, where you can switch all traffic from any AP to an uplink port that you specify. However, this is not packet level switching. It is not based on VLAN IDs. See the VLAN Port Configuration parameter in the dedicated user guide that supports the CMM product that you are deploying. Filtering management through Ethernet You can configure the SM to disallow any device that is connected to its Ethernet port from accessing the IP address of the SM. If you set the Ethernet Access Control parameter to Enabled, then • no attempt to access the SM management interface (by http, SNMP, ftp, or tftp) through Ethernet can succeed. • any attempt to access the SM management interface over the air (by IP address, presuming that LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility is set to Public, or by link from the Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab in the AP) is unaffected. Allowing management from only specified IP addresses The Security tab of the Configuration web page in the AP and SM includes the IP Access Control parameter. You can specify one, two, or three IP addresses that should be allowed to access the management interface (by HTTP, SNMP, FTP, or TFTP). If you select • IP Access Filtering Disabled, then management access is allowed from any IP address, even if the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameters are populated. • IP Access Filtering Enabled, and specify at least one address in the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameter, then management access is limited to the specified address(es). Configuring management IP by DHCP The IP tab in the Configuration web page of every radio contains a LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, DHCP State parameter that, if enabled, causes the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) to be obtained through DHCP instead of the values of those individual parameters. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also viewable, but is not settable, in the Network Interface tab of the Home page. In the SM, this parameter is settable • in the NAT tab of the Configuration web page, but only if NAT is enabled. • in the IP tab of the Configuration web page, but only if the Network Accessibility parameter in the IP tab is set to Public. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-135 PMP 450 Planning Guide Planning for airlink security Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP systems employ the following form of encryption for security of the wireless link: • DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance or throughput of the system. • AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A. Planning for RF Telnet Access Control The RF Telnet Access feature restricts Telnet access to the AP from a device situated below a network SM (downstream from the AP). This is a security enhancement to restrict RF-interface sourced AP access specifically to the LAN1 IP address and LAN2 IP address (Radio Private Address, typically 192.168.101.[LUID]). This restriction disallows unauthorized users from running Telnet commands on the AP that can change AP configuration or modifying network-critical components such as routing and ARP tables. Forwarding Downlink PPPoE PADI packets The AP supports the control of forwarding of PPPoE PADI (PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation) packets. This forwarding is configured on the AP GUI Configuration, Radio tab by parameter PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding. When set to “Enabled”, the AP allows downstream and upstream transmission of PPPoE PADI packets. When set to “Disabled”, the AP will NOT allow PPPoE PADI packets to be sent out of the AP RF interface (downstream) but will allow PPPoE PADI packets to enter the RF interface (upstream) and exit the Ethernet interface. Planning for RADIUS integration PMP 450 modules include support for the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) protocol supporting Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA). RADIUS Functions RADIUS protocol support provides the following functions: • 1-136 SM Authentication allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from connecting to “rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but is not used for APs. Cambium modules support EAPTTLS and EAP-MSCHAPv2 authentication methods. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide • SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), CIR (Committed Information Rate), High Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when an SM registers to an AP. • SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing. This accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP. • Centralized AP and SM user name and password management allows AP and SM usernames and access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician) to be centrally administered in the RADIUS server instead of on each radio and tracks access events (logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This accounting does not track and report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management System (EMS) such as Cambium Networks Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability to perform accounting functions on the subscriber/end user/customer account. • Framed IP allows operators to use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing to SM modules (framed IP address). Planning for SNMP security Canopy modules provide the following Configuration web page parameters in the SNMP tab. These govern SNMP access from the manager to the agent: • Community String, which specifies the password for security between managers and the agent. • Accessing Subnet, which specifies the subnet mask that allows managers to poll the agents. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-137 PMP 450 Planning Guide Ordering components This section describes how to select components for PMP 450 Greenfield network or PMP 450 network migration. It specifies Cambium part numbers for PMP 450 components. PMP 450 component part numbers Table 61 PMP 450 components Part Number Product Description Sales Models 1-138 C024045A001A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES C024045A002A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES C024045C001A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C024045C002A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C024045C003A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C024045C004A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped C024045C005A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C024045C006A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C024045C007A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C024045C008A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped C035045A001A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES C035045A002A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES C035045C001A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C035045C002A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C035045C003A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C035045C004A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide C035045C005A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C035045C006A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C035045C007A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C035045C008A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped C036045A001A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, AES C036045A002A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US/Canada Only, DES C036045C001A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C036045C002A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C036045C003A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C036045C004A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped C036045C005A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C036045C006A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C036045C007A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C036045C008A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped C054045A001A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point C054045A002A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US C054045C005A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C054045C006A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C054045C007A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C054045C008A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped AP Antenna Options 85009324001 5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree Sector 85009325001 5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree Sector C024045D601A 2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-139 PMP 450 Planning Guide C030045D901A 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector 30009406002 N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length) AP Optional Equipment ACPSSW-20A POWER SUPPLY,20W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ ACPSSW-21A POWER SUPPLY,20W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ +C8 AC ACPS120WA POWER SUPPLY,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5 600SSH SURGE PROTECTOR SMMB2A UNIVERSAL MOUNTING BRACKET 1070CKHH CMM MICRO (OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE) 1090CKHH CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED SWITCH AND GPS 1091HH CMM4 NO SWITCH 1092HH CMM4 RACK MOUNT ASSEMBLY 1096H UNIVERSAL GPS MODULE SM Optional Equipment 1-140 ACPSSW-09B POWER SUPPLY,13.6W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ ACPSSW-10B POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+ARG ACPSSW-11B POWER SUPPLY, 13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+AUS ACPSSW-12C POWER SUPPLY,ASSY,P/S,29.5V90-240VAC/50-60HZ PS ACPSSW-13B POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240/50-60+FIXED US ACPSSW-14A POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+BRAZ HK2022A 53CM OFFSET, REFLECTOR DISH KIT,4PK SMMB1A UNIVERSAL MOUNTING KIT 600SSH SURGE PROTECTOR pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Upgrade Keys C000045K002A PMP 450 4 TO 10 MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K003A PMP 450 4 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K004A PMP 450 4 TO Uncapped UPGRADE KEY C000045K005A PMP 450 10 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K006A PMP 450 10 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K007A PMP 450 20 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY Extended Warranty SG00TS4009A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year SG00TS4017A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years SG00TS4025A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years SG00TS4010A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year SG00TS4018A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years SG00TS4026A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years Part Number Product Description Sales Models C024045A001A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point C024045A003A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES C024045C001A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C024045C002A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C024045C003A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-141 PMP 450 Planning Guide 1-142 C024045C004A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped C024045C005A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C024045C006A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C024045C007A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C024045C008A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped C035045A001A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point C035045A003A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES C035045C001A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C035045C002A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C035045C003A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C035045C004A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped C035045C005A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C035045C006A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C035045C007A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C035045C008A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped C036045A001A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point C036045A003A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES C036045C001A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C036045C002A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C036045C003A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C036045C004A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped C036045C005A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C036045C006A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C036045C007A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide C036045C008A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped C054045A001A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point C054045A002A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US only C054045C005A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps C054045C006A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps C054045C007A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps C054045C008A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped AP Antenna Options 85009324001 5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree Sector 85009325001 5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree Sector C024045D601A 2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector C030045D901A 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector 30009406002 N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length) AP Optional Equipment ACPSSW-20A POWER SUPPLY,20W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ ACPSSW-21A POWER SUPPLY,20W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ +C8 AC ACPS120WA POWER SUPPLY,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5 600SSH SURGE PROTECTOR SMMB2A UNIVERSAL MOUNTING BRACKET 1070CKHH CMM MICRO (OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE) 1090CKHH CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED SWITCH AND GPS 1091HH CMM4 NO SWITCH 1092HH CMM4 RACK MOUNT ASSEMBLY 1096H UNIVERSAL GPS MODULE pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-143 PMP 450 Planning Guide SM Optional Equipment ACPSSW-09B POWER SUPPLY,13.6W, 29.5V, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ ACPSSW-10B POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+ARG ACPSSW-11B POWER SUPPLY, 13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+AUS ACPSSW-12C POWER SUPPLY,ASSY,P/S,29.5V90-240VAC/50-60HZ PS ACPSSW-13B POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240/50-60+FIXED US ACPSSW-14A POWER SUPPLY,13.6W,29.5V,100-240VAC/50-60HZ+BRAZ HK2022A 53CM OFFSET, REFLECTOR DISH KIT,4PK SMMB1A UNIVERSAL MOUNTING KIT 600SSH SURGE PROTECTOR Upgrade Keys C000045K002A PMP 450 4 TO 10 MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K003A PMP 450 4 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K004A PMP 450 4 TO Uncapped UPGRADE KEY C000045K005A PMP 450 10 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K006A PMP 450 10 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY C000045K007A PMP 450 20 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY Extended Warranty 1-144 SG00TS4009A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year SG00TS4017A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years SG00TS4025A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years SG00TS4010A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year SG00TS4018A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years SG00TS4026A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide pmp-0047 (March 2014) 1-145 PMP 450 Planning Guide List of Tables Chapter 2: Legal information This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements. Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be made unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and will void the manufacturer’s warranty. The following topics are described in this chapter: • Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 2-2 • Hardware warranty on page 2-10 • Limit of liability on page 2-11 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Cambium Networks end user license agreement Acceptance of this agreement In connection with Cambium’s delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing embedded or preloaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium is willing to license this certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement (“Agreement”). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND, RETURN THIS PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. Definitions In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in executable form and in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet, hardware, or firmware) licensed to you. The word “Documentation” refers to electronic or printed manuals and accompanying instructional aids licensed to you. The word “Product” refers to Cambium’s fixed wireless broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use. Grant of license Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal, nonexclusive, nontransferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the Conditions of Use set forth in “Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any terms or conditions relating to the Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase order, purchase order acknowledgment or other order document that are different from, or in addition to, the terms of this Agreement will not be binding on the parties, even if payment is accepted. Conditions of use Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement. 2-2 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary 1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will take all necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement. 2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes; (ii) only as described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with this Agreement. 3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance with the terms set forth in this Agreement. 4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws, international treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording) except that you may either: (i) make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software (which typically is supplied on diskette, CD-ROM, or downloadable internet), solely for back-up purposes; or (ii) copy the transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk, provided you keep the original solely for back-up purposes. If the Documentation is in printed form, it may not be copied. If the Documentation is in electronic form, you may print out 1 copy, which then may not be copied. With regard to the copy made for backup or archival purposes, you agree to reproduce any Cambium copyright notice, and other proprietary legends appearing thereon. Such copyright notice(s) may appear in any of several forms, including machine-readable form, and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in which it appears, to the extent it is physically possible to do so. Unauthorized duplication of the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement, and in the United States is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment. 5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any country for which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without first obtaining such license or approval. Title and restrictions If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of the terms of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title and copyrights to the Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium and its licensors. You will not, and will not permit others to: (i) modify, translate, decompile, bootleg, reverse engineer, disassemble, or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation, (ii) copy the look-and-feel or functionality of the Software or Documentation; (iii) remove any proprietary notices, marks, labels, or logos from the Software or Documentation; (iv) rent or transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other party without Cambium’s prior written consent; or (v) utilize any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any copy protection device, should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection device. If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such as diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets your specific needs, and will not loan, rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the package without Cambium’s written consent. Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation, or failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement, will result in automatic termination of this license. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 2-3 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Confidentiality You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in irreparable harm to Cambium for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for which Cambium will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief. If applicable, you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those of your employees and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal business purposes, and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation, using the same degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own proprietary software, but in no event less than reasonable care. You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i) was in the public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no fault of yours; (iii) was given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is independently developed by you; or (v) is disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Cambium prior to such disclosure and provide Cambium with a reasonable opportunity to respond. Right to use Cambium’s name Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this Agreement or thereafter, use any trademark of Cambium, or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any Cambium trademark, either alone or in any combination with another word or words. Transfer The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written consent of Cambium, regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical or electronic means. Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement. Updates During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any executed Maintenance and Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive Updates. An “Update” means any code in any form which is a bug fix, patch, error correction, or minor enhancement, but excludes any major feature added to the Software. Updates are available for download at the support website. Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided, then the terms of this Agreement will apply. 2-4 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Maintenance Except as provided above, Cambium is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the Software under this Agreement. Disclaimer CAMBIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. CAMBIUM MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you. Limitation of liability THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF CAMBIUM UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT LICENSED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CAMBIUM BE LIABLE IN ANY WAY FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST BUSINESS PROFITS, OR LIABILITY OR INJURY TO THIRD PERSONS, WHETHER FORESEEABLE OR NOT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER CAMBIUM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some jurisdictions do not permit limitations of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusions may not apply to you. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 2-5 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary U.S. government If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government, the following applies. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 (JUNE 1987), if applicable, unless being provided to the Department of Defense. If being provided to the Department of Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if applicable. Software and Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice, or other notice referring specifically to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms and conditions of this Agreement will each continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR and DFARS, as applicable to the particular procuring agency and procurement transaction. Term of license Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Your right to use the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you. Within 30 days after termination of this Agreement, you will certify to Cambium in writing that through your best efforts, and to the best of your knowledge, the original and all copies, in whole or in part, in any form, of the Software and all related material and Documentation, have been destroyed, except that, with prior written consent from Cambium, you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes. You may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license or the Product, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. Any attempt to otherwise sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is null and void. Governing law This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois. Assignment This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent. Survival of provisions The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of this Agreement, then it will survive. 2-6 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Entire agreement This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium may modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws. Third party software The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other third-party suppliers. The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party Software UNLESS A SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY LICENSE. ZLIB Copyright Notice Copyright © 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu pmp-0047 (March 2014) 2-7 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Modernizr Copyright Notice MIT License Copyright © 2009-2010 Faruk Ates Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. BSD License Copyright © 2010, Faruk Ates All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the Organization nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. D3 Copyright Notice Copyright (c) 2013, Michael Bostock All rights reserved. 2-8 • Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: • Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. • Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide • Glossary The name Michael Bostock may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MICHAEL BOSTOCK BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 2-9 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Hardware warranty Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium or a Cambium Point-To-Point Distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days. 2-10 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Limit of liability IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 2-11 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Chapter 3: Reference information This chapter contains reference information and regulatory notices that apply to the PMP 450 Series products. The following topics are described in this chapter: • Equipment specifications on page 3-2 contains specifications of the AP, SM and other equipment required for PMP 450 installations. • Wireless specifications on page 3-10 contains specifications of the PMP 450 wireless interface, including RF bands, channel width and link loss. • Data network specifications on page 3-11 contains specifications of the PMP 450 Ethernet interface. • Compliance with safety standards on page 3-12 lists the safety specifications against which the PMP 450 has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits. • Compliance with radio regulations on page 3-17 describes how the PMP 450 complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries. • Notifications on page 3-42 has notifications made to regulatory bodies for the PMP 450. PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Equipment specifications This section contains specifications of the AP, SM, associated supplies required for PMP 450 installations. AP specifications The PMP 450 AP conforms to the specifications listed in Table 62. These specifications apply to all PMP 450 product variants (except where noted). Table 62 Connectorized AP physical specifications Category Specification Product Model Number 2.4 GHz C024045A001A, C024045A003A 3.5 GHz C035045A001A, C035045A002A, C035045A003A, C035045A004A 3.6 GHz C036045A001A, C036045A002A, C036045A003A, C036045A004A 5 GHz C054045A001A, C054045A002A, C054045A003A Channel Spacing 5 MHz Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments (2.4GHz, 5 GHz) 10 MHz 20 MHz channel bandwidth Configurable on 50 kHz increments (3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz) Frequency Range 2.4 GHz 2400 – 2483.5 MHz 3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting) 3.6 GHz 3650 – 3700 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting) 5 GHz 5470 – 5875 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting) Spectrum Channel Width 5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10 MHz or 20 MHz Interface 3-2 MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Proprietary Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM Ethernet Interface 10/100BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3 compliant) Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SNMP, HTTP, FTP, RADIUS pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Category Specification Network Management HTTP, FTP, SNMP v2c, Syslog VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-inQ), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic port VID Performance Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5 MHz Channel, Single Branch Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 10 MHz Channel, Single Branch Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 20 MHz Channel, Single Branch 2.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -78 dBm, 8x = -68 dBm 3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -80 dBm, 8x = -73 dBm 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -80 dBm, 8x = -73 dBm 5.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -84 dBm, 6x = -80 dBm, 8x = -64 dBm 5.8 GHz OFDM: 1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -85 dBm, 6x = -79 dBm, 8x = -69 dBm 2.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -76 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm 3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77 dBm, 8x = -70 dBm 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77 dBm, 8x = -70 dBm 5.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -82 dBm, 6x = -75 dBm, 8x = -62 dBm 5.8 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -76 dBm, 8x = -64 dBm 2.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm 3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -87 dBm, 2x = -87 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -87 dBm, 2x = -87 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm 5.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x = -72 dBm, 8x = -61 dBm 5.8 GHz OFDM: 1x = -87 dBm, 2x = -87 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -72 dBm, 8x = -62 dBm pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-3 PMP 450 Planning Guide Category Maximum Deployment Range Glossary Specification 2.4 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) 3.5 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) 3.6 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) 5 GHz Up to 40 km (25 mi) Subscribers Per Sector Up to 238 ARQ Yes Cyclic Prefix 1/16 Modulation Levels (Adaptive) QPSK, QPSK (MIMO-B), 16-QAM (MIMO-B), 64-QAM (MIMO-B), 256QAM (MIMO-B) Latency 3 - 5 ms Packets Per Second 12, 500 GPS Synchronization Yes, via CMM3, CMM4, or UGPS Quality of Service Diffserv QoS Link Budget Combined Transmit Power -30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-configurable intervals (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz) -30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-configurable intervals (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz) Antenna Gain 2.4 GHz 17 dBi Dual Slant 3.5 GHz 17 dBi Dual Slant 3.6 GHz 17 dBi Dual Slant 5 GHz 17 dBi Horizontal and Vertical Maximum Transmit Power 22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4GHz, 5 GHz) 25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz) Physical Wind Loading 3-4 2.4 GHz 216 km/hour (135 mi/hour) 3.5 GHz 216 km/hour (135 mi/hour) 3.6 GHz 216 km/hour (135 mi/hour) 5 GHz 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour) pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Category Specification Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type Environmental IP67 Temperature -40ºC to +55ºC (-40ºF to +131ºF) Weight 2.4 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna 3.5 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna 3.6 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna 5 GHz 5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna Dimensions (H x W x D) 2.4 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”) Antenna: 112.2 x 24.5 x 11.7 cm (44.2” x 9.6” x 4.6”) 3.5 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna 3.6 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna 5 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”) Antenna: 51 x 13 x 7.3 cm (20.2” x 5.1” x 2.9”) Maximum Power Consumption 14 W Input Voltage 22 to 32 VDC Security Encryption 56-bit DES, AES Certifications FCC ID Z8H89FT0002 (5.4, 5.8 GHz) Z8H89FT0004 (2.4 GHz) Z8H89FT0010 (3.6 GHz) Industry Canada Cert 109W-0002 (5.4, 5.8 GHz) 109W-0004 (2.4 GHz) 109W-0008 (3.5 GHz) 109W-0010 (3.6 GHz) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-5 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Category Specification CE EN 301 893 v1.6.1 (5.4 GHz) EN 302 502 v1.2.1 (5.8 GHz) 3-6 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary SM specifications The PMP 450 SM conforms to the specifications listed in Table 63. These specifications apply to all PMP 450 product variants. Table 63 SM physical specifications Category Specification Product Model Number 2.4 GHz C024045C001A, C024045C002A, C024045C003A, C024045C004A, C024045C005A, C024045C006A, C024045C007A, C024045C008A 3.5 GHz C035045C001A, C035045C002A, C035045C003A, C035045C004A, C035045C005A, C035045C006A, C035045C007A, C035045C008A 3.6 GHz C036045C001A, C036045C002A, C036045C003A, C036045C004A, C036045C005A, C036045C006A, C036045C007A, C036045C008A 5 GHz C054045C001A, C054045C002A, C054045C003A, C054045C004A, C054045C005A, C054045C006A, C054045C007A, C054045C008A, Spectrum Channel Spacing 5 MHz Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments (2.4GHz, 5 GHz) 10MHz, 20 MHz channel bandwidth Configurable on 50 kHz increments (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz) Frequency Range 2.4 GHz 2400 – 2483.5 MHz 3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting) 3.6 GHz 3650 – 3700 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting) 5 GHz 5470 – 5875 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting) Channel Width 5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10 MHz or 20 MHz Interface MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Proprietary Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM Ethernet Interface 10/100BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3 compliant) Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SNMP, HTTP, FTP, RADIUS Network Management HTTP, FTP, SNMP v2c, Syslog pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-7 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Category Specification VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic port VID Performance Maximum Deployment Range 2.4 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) with reflector dish 3.5 GHz Up to 40 km (25 mi) with reflector dish 3.6 GHz Up to 40 km (25 mi) with reflector dish 5 GHz Up to 40 km (25 mi) with reflector dish ARQ Yes Cyclic Prefix 1/16 Modulation Levels (Adaptive) 1x = QPSK, 2x = QPSK-MIMO-B, 4x = 16-QAM-MIMO-B, 6x = 64QAM-MIMO-B, 8x = 256-QAM-MIMO-B Latency 3 - 5 ms GPS Synchronization Yes Quality of Service Diffserv QoS Link Budget Antenna Beam Width 55º azimuth, 55º elevation (both horizontal and vertical) Combined Transmit Power -30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz -30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Antenna Gain 2.4 GHz 7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch 3.5 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch 3.6 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch 5 GHz 9 dBi H+V, integrated patch Maximum Transmit Power 22 dBm combined (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz) 25 dBm combined (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz) Reflector Gain 2.4 GHz +12 dBi 3.5 GHz +11 dBi 3.6 GHz +11 dBi 5 GHz +14 dBi CLIP Gain (5 GHz only) 3-8 +8 dBi pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Category Specification LENS Gain (5 GHz only) +5.5 dBi Physical Wind Loading 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour) Environmental IP55 Temperature -40ºC to +55ºC (-40ºF to +131ºF) Weight 0.45 kg (1 lb) Dimensions (H x W x D) 30 x 9 x 9 cm (11.75” x 3.4” x 3.4”) Maximum Power Consumption 12 W Input Voltage 20 - 32 VDC Security Encryption 56-bit DES, AES Certifications FCC ID Z8H89FT0001 (5.4, 5.8 GHz) Z8H89FT0003 (2.4 GHz) Z8H89FT0009 (3.6 GHz) Industry Canada Cert 109W-0001 (5.4, 5.8 GHz) 109W-0003 (2.4 GHz) 109W-0007 (3.5 GHz) 109W-0009 (3.6 GHz) CE EN 301 893 v1.6.1 (5.4 GHz) EN 302 502 v1.2.1 (5.8 GHz) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-9 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Wireless specifications This section contains specifications of the PMP 450 wireless interface. These specifications include RF bands, channel bandwidth, spectrum settings, maximum power and link loss. General wireless specifications Table 64 lists the wireless specifications that apply to all PMP 450 variants. Table 64 PMP 450 wireless specifications Item Specification Channel selection Manual selection (fixed frequency). Manual power control To avoid interference to other users of the band, maximum power can be set lower than the default power limit. Duplex scheme Adaptive TDD Range 3-10 2.4 GHz 40 mi / 64 km 3.5 GHz 40 mi / 64 km 3.6 GHz 40 mi / 64 km 5 GHz 25 mi / 40 km Over-the-air encryption DES, AES Error Correction FEC pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Data network specifications This section contains specifications of the PMP 450 Ethernet interface. Ethernet interface The PMP 450 Ethernet port conforms to the specifications listed in Table 65. Table 65 PMP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications Ethernet Bridging Specification Protocol IEEE 802.3 compatible QoS IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad, DSCP IPv4 Interface 10/100/BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated Maximum Ethernet Frame Size 1714 Bytes Practical Ethernet rates will depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols and platforms used. Over the air throughput is restricted to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving end of the link. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-11 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Compliance with safety standards This section lists the safety specifications against which the PMP 450 has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits. Electrical safety compliance The PMP 450 hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications listed in Table 66. Table 66 PMP 450 safety compliance specifications Region Specification USA UL 60950 Canada CSA C22.2 No.60950 International CB certified & certificate to IEC 60950 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance Table 67 lists the EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450. Table 67 EMC emissions compliance Variant Region Specification (Type Approvals) PMP 450 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210 International EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2 EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 3-12 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Human exposure to radio frequency energy Standards Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are: • ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. • Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national regulations. • Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC). • US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at http://www.fcc.gov, and the policies, guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, as well as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65. • Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at http://www.hcsc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html and Safety Code 6. • EN 50383:2002 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems (110 MHz - 40 GHz). • BS EN 50385:2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields (110 MHz – 40 GHz) – general public. • ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for the general public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields. Power density exposure limit Install the radios for the PMP 450 family of PMP wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons. The applicable power density exposure limit from the standards (see Human exposure to radio frequency energy on page 3-13) is: • 10 W/m2 for RF energy in the 2.4, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4-GHz and 5.8-GHz frequency bands. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-13 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Calculation of power density The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that provides a worst case analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be provided, if required. Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows: S= P .G 4π d 2 Where: Is: power density in W/m2 maximum average transmit power capability of the radio, in W total Tx gain as a factor, converted from dB distance from point source, in m Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields: d= P.G 4π .S Calculated distances and power compliance margins Table 68 shows calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and resulting margins for each frequency band and antenna combination. These are conservative distances that include compliance margins. At these and greater separation distances, the power density from the RF field is below generally accepted limits for the general population. PMP 450 equipment adheres to all applicable EIRP limits for transmit power when operating in MIMO mode. Separation distances and compliance margins include compensation for both transmitters. Explanation of terms used in Table 68: Tx burst – maximum average transmit power in burst (Watt) P – maximum average transmit power capability of the radio (Watt) (combined transmitters) G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB S – power density (W/m2) d – minimum distance from point source (meters) R – recommended distances (meters) C – compliance factor 3-14 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 68 Power Compliance Margins Frequency Antenna Band Variable 5 GHz OFDM 2.4 GHz OFDM 3.5 GHz OFDM 3.6 GHz OFDM 2.4, 5 GHz OFDM Integrated SM, 9 dBi patch 0.158 W (22 dBm) 7.9 (9 dB) 10 W/m Integrated SM, 9 dBi patch with 8 dBi CLIP 0.158 W (22 dBm) 50 (17 dB) 10 W/m2 Integrated SM, 9 dBi patch with 5.5 dBi LENS 0.158 W (22 dBm) 28 (14.5 dB) 10 W/m2 Integrated SM, 9 dBi patch with 14 dBi Reflector Dish 0.158 W (22 dBm) 199 (23 dB) 10 W/m2 Integrated SM, 8 dBi patch 0.158 W (22 dBm) 6.3 10 W/m2 (8 dB) or 1 mW/cm Integrated SM, 8 dBi patch with 12 dBi Reflector Dish 0.158 W (22 dBm) 100 (20 dB) 10 W/m2 Integrated SM, 8 dBi patch 0.316 W (25 dBm) 6.3 10 W/m2 (8 dB) or 1 mW/cm Integrated SM, 8 dBi patch with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 0.316 W (25 dBm) 79.4 (19 dB) 10 W/m2 Integrated SM, 8 dBi patch 0.316 W (25 dBm) 6.3 10 W/m2 (8 dB) or 1 mW/cm Integrated SM, 8 dBi patch with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 0.316 W (25 dBm) 79.4 (19 dB) 10 W/m2 Connectorized SM, with 22 dBi panel 0.316 W (19 dBm) 158.5 (22 dB) 10 W/m2 Connectorized AP, with 17 dBi Sector Antenna 0.158 W (22 dBm) 50 10 W/m2 (17 dB) or 1 mW/cm2 pmp-0047 (March 2014) Recommended Power Separation Compliance Distance Margin 10 cm 20 cm (8 in) 40.27 25 cm 50 cm (20 in) 39.7 18.7 cm 50 cm (20 in) 71.01 50 cm 100 cm (40 in) 40 8.9 cm 20 cm (8 in) 50.5 35 cm 100 cm (40 in) 79.5 12.5 cm 50 cm (8 in) 160 44.6 cm 100 cm (40 in) 50.2 12.5 cm 50 cm (8 in) 160 44.6 cm 100 cm (40 in) 50.2 63.1 cm 130 cm (51 in) 25.1 25.1 cm 50 cm (20 in) 39.8 or 1 mW/cm or 1 mW/cm2 or 1 mW/cm or 1 mW/cm2 or 1 mW/cm2 or 1 mW/cm2 or 1 mW/cm2 or 1 mW/cm 3-15 PMP 450 Planning Guide 3.5, 3.6 GHz OFDM Connectorized AP, with 17 dBi Sector Antenna Glossary 0.316 W (25 dBm) 50 10 W/m2 (17 dB) or 1 mW/cm2 35.4 cm 100 cm (40 in) 79.7 Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log(G).The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging. If there are no EIRP limits in the country of deployment, use the distance calculations for FCC 5.8 GHz for all frequency bands. 3-16 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Compliance with radio regulations This section describes how the PMP 450 complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium could void the user’s authority to operate the system. Type approvals This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency bands in which the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in these bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and installations. Table 69 lists the radio specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450 frequency variants. Table 69 Radio certifications Variant Region Specification (Type Approvals) 2.4-GHz PMP 450 Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Canada RSS Gen and RSS 192 Europe ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2 Canada RSS Gen and RSS 192 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Europe ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Europe ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1 3.5-GHz PMP 450 3.6-GHz PMP 450 5.4-GHz PMP 450 5.8-GHz PMP 450 pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-17 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary DFS for 5.4 GHz Radios Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a requirement in several countries and regions for 5 GHz unlicensed systems to detect radar systems and avoid co-channel operation. DFS and other regulatory requirements drive the settings for the following parameters, as discussed in this section: • Country Code • Primary Frequency • Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 Frequencies • External Antenna Gain On the AP, the Home => DFS Status” page shows current DFS status of all three frequencies and a DFS log of past DFS events. Figure 33 AP DFS Status Background and Operation The modules use region-specific DFS based on the Country Code selected on the module’s Configuration, General page. By directing installers and technicians to set the Country Code correctly, the operator gains confidence the module is operating according to national or regional regulations without having to deal with the details for each region. Some regions have requirements to avoid certain 5.4-GHz frequencies used by some weather radar. To meet this requirement, modules set to Europe will display the certain channel frequencies shown in page 3-21 on the AP’s Carrier Frequency pop-up and on the SM’s Frequency Scan Selection List. Table 70 on page 3-19 shows the details of DFS operation and channels available for each Country Code, including whether DFS is active on the AP, SM, which DFS regulation apply, and any channel restrictions. DFS does not apply to 4.9 GHz. 3-18 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 70 OFDM DFS operation based on Country Code setting Region Code Asia Oceania Europe South America Country Code Band AP SM Vietnam 5.4-GHz ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS India, Vietnam, Indonesia No 5.8-GHz No effect No effect 5.4-GHz FCC DFS No effect Yes 5.8-GHz No effect No effect No 5.4-GHz ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS Yes 5.8-GHz ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1 DFS ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1 DFS No 5.4-GHz ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS No effect No 5.8-GHz No effect No effect No 2.4-GHz No effect No effect No 5.4-GHz FCC/IC DFS No effect Yes 5.8-GHz No effect No effect No 2.4GHz No effect No effect No 5.4-GHz FCC DFS No effect Yes 5.8-GHz No effect No effect No 2.4-GHz No effect No effect No Australia Denmark, Finland, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Liechtenstein, Norway, Portugal, Serbia, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom Brazil Canada North America United States Other- Weather Radar NotchOut Other-FCC pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-19 PMP 450 Planning Guide Region Code Country Code Regulatory Glossary Band AP SM Weather Radar NotchOut 5.4-GHz FCC DFS FCC DFS 5.8-GHz No effect No effect 5.4-GHz ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1 DFS No 5.8-GHz ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1 DFS ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1 DFS No Other-ETSI Country Codes and available spectrum The following tables list the Country Codes available on PMP 450 AP and SM units. Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways: • Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus configured antenna gain) • DFS operation is enabled based on the configured region code, if applicable PMP 450 equipment shipped to the United States is locked to a Country Code setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must be configured with the corresponding Country Code to comply with local regulatory requirements. 3-20 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 71 Center channel details based on Country Code, 2.4 GHz OFDM Radio Model Country PMP 450 Series AP, 2.4GHz PMP 450 Series SM, 2.4GHz, internal Patch Antenna PMP 450 Series SM, 2.4GHz, Dish Antenna Channel Size Band Edges (MHz) Range of Center Frequencies Available (MHz) ‡‡‡‡‡‡ Center Channel Spacing # of Center Channels (based on PMP 450 available range) # of Nonoverlapping center channels (based on PMP 450 available range) 5 MHz 2402.5 – 2475 30 15 10 MHz 2405 – 2470 27 20 MHz 2417.5– 2460 18 5 MHz 2402.5 – 2475 30 15 10 MHz 2405 – 2470 27 United States, Canada, OtherFCC 20 MHz 24002483.5 2.5 MHz 2417.5– 2460 18 5 MHz 2407.5 – 2465 24 12 10 MHz 2420 – 2450 13 20 MHz 2430 – 2445 For each edge frequency, transmit power must be reduced by 3 dB. ‡‡‡‡‡‡ For each edge frequency, transmit power must be reduced by 3 dB. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-21 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 72 AP Default combined transmits power per Country Code and Lower/Upper Band Edge Path Max TX Detail, 2.4 GHz. Country Ant. Comb. TX AP Comb. TX AP Comb. AP Device Gain Default EIRP Default EIRP TX EIRP Country (dBi) Setting Limit Setting Limit Default Limit Code Setting (18 dBi – 1dB cable loss) Setting 5 MHz Channel 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Canada 17 19 United States 17 19 36 36 19 19 36 19 36 Canada 36 19 36 United States Lower Band Edge Frequency Path A Max TX (MHz) Power Path B Max TX Power 5 MHz 2402.5 16 16 10 MHz 2405 15 14 20 MHz 2417.5 15 15 5 MHz 2402.5 15 15 10 MHz 2405 15 15 20 MHz 2417.5 18 18 AP SM Upper Band Edge Frequency Path A Max TX (MHz) Power Path B Max TX Power 5 MHz 2475 16 16 10 MHz 2470 15 14 20 MHz 2460 15 15 5 MHz 2475 15 15 10 MHz 2470 15 15 20 MHz 2460 18 18 AP SM 3-22 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 73 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.5 GHz Region Code Range of Level 1 Level 2 Other-ETSI Other (Any country that follows ETSI rules) India Asia Indonesia China Oceania Australia Channel Band Edges Center Size (MHz) Frequencies Available (MHz) 5 MHz 10 MHz America 3400 – 3600 Europe §§§§§§ range) 3405 - 3595 50 kHz (based on PMP 450 available range) 3900 39 3800 19 5 MHz 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 59 5800 29 10 MHz 3300 – 3600 3305 - 3595 50 kHz 20 MHz 3310 - 3590 5600 14 5 MHz 3302.5 – 3397.5 1900 19 1800 10 MHz 3300 – 3400 3305 - 3395 50 kHz 20 MHz 3310 - 3390 1600 5 MHz 3302.5 – 3397.5 1900 19 1800 10 MHz 3300 – 3400 3305 - 3395 50 kHz 20 MHz 3310 - 3390 1600 5 MHz 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 59 5800 29 3310 - 3590 5600 14 3452.5 – 3647.5 3900 39 3800 19 3460 – 3640 3600 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 59 5800 29 5600 14 3900 39 3800 19 10 MHz 3300 – 3600 3450 -3650 §§§§§§ 10 MHz (3475-3650 20 MHz deployments) 10 MHz for new 3300 – 3600 3305 - 3595 3455 – 3645 3305 - 3595 50 kHz 50 kHz 3402.5 – 3597.5 3400 - 3600 10 MHz 50 kHz 3310 - 3590 5 MHz (Denmark, Finland, 450 available 3600 20 MHz Europe Spacing center channels 3410 - 3590 5 MHz Mexico Channels (based on PMP # of Nonoverlapping 20 MHz 5 MHz North Center Channel 3402.5 – 3597.5 20 MHz Canada # of Center 50 kHz 3405 - 3595 System Release 13.0 allows an upper limit of 3600MHz. Range may be extended in a future release. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-23 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Region Code Range of Level 1 Level 2 Channel Band Edges Center Size (MHz) Frequencies Available (MHz) # of Center Center Channels Channel (based on PMP Spacing 450 available range) # of Nonoverlapping center channels (based on PMP 450 available range) France, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Norway, 20 MHz 3410 - 3590 3600 Portugal, Serbia, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom) 3-24 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Device Country Limit AP EIRP Default TX Combined Limit AP EIRP Default TX Combined Limit AP EIRP Gain (dBi) Default Antenna TX Country Combined Table 74 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.5 GHz band. 5 MHz Channel 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Code Setting (Level 2) Australia 17 23 57 23 60 23 63 Australia Canada 17 23 62 23 62 23 62 Canada China 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A China Denmark 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Denmark Finland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Finland France 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 France Germany 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Germany Greece 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Greece India 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A India Iceland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Iceland Indonesia 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A Indonesia Ireland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Ireland Italy 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Italy Liechtenstein 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Liechtenstein Mexico 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A Mexico Norway 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Norway Portugal 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Portugal Serbia 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Serbia Spain 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Spain Switzerland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Switzerland United Kingdom 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 United Kingdom pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-25 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 75 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.6 GHz Region Code Level 1 Level 2 Channel Band Edges Size (MHz) 5 MHz Other Other - ETSI Other (Any country that follows ETSI rules) Other – FCC India 10 MHz Range of Center Center Frequencies Channel Available (MHz) Spacing 3552.5 – 3797.5 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz # of Center Channels (based on PMP 450 available range) # of Nonoverlapping center channels (based on PMP 450 available range) 4900 48 4800 23 20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 10.5 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 48 4800 23 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 10.5 5 MHz 3652.5 – 3697.5 2900 28 2800 13 10 MHz 3650 – 3700 3655 – 3695 50 kHz 20 MHz 3660 – 3690 2600 5.5 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 48 4800 23 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 10.5 5 MHz 3602.5 – 3797.5 3900 38 3800 18 Asia Indonesia Oceania Australia Canada North America Mexico 10 MHz 3600 – 3800 50 kHz 20 MHz 3610 – 3790 3600 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 48 4800 23 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 10.5 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3697.5 2900 28 2800 13 10 MHz 3550 – 3700 3555 – 3695 50 kHz 20 MHz 3560 – 3690 2600 5.5 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3747.5 3900 38 3800 18 3600 900 800 10 MHz 3550 – 3750 20 MHz 3555 – 3745 3652.5 – 3697.5 50 kHz 3650 – 3700 10 MHz 50 kHz 3560 – 3740 5 MHz United States 3-26 3605 – 3795 3655 – 3695 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Region Code Level 1 Level 2 Europe (Denmark, Channel Band Edges Size (MHz) Range of Center Center Frequencies Channel Available (MHz) Spacing # of Center Channels (based on PMP 450 available range) # of Nonoverlapping center channels (based on PMP 450 available range) 20 MHz 3660 – 3690 600 0.5 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 48 10 MHz 3555 – 3795 4800 23 4600 10.5 Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Europe Ireland, Italy, 3550 – 3800 Liechtenstein, 50 kHz Norway, Portugal, Serbia, 20 MHz 3560 – 3790 Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-27 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Australia Device Country Limit AP EIRP Default TX Combined Limit AP EIRP Default TX Combined Limit AP EIRP Gain (dBi) Default Antenna TX Country Combined Table 76 AP default combined transmit power per Country Code – 3.6 GHz band 5 MHz Channel 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Code Setting (Level 2) 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A Australia 17 25 62 25 62 25 62 Canada 17 19 37 22 40 25 43 Canada Denmark 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Denmark Finland 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Finland France 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 France Germany 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Germany Greece 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Greece India 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A India Indonesia 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A Indonesia Ireland 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Ireland Italy 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Italy Liechtenstein 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Liechtenstein Mexico 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A Mexico Norway 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Norway Portugal 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Portugal Serbia 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Serbia Spain 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Spain Switzerland 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Switzerland United Kingdom 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 United Kingdom United States 17 19 37 22 40 25 43 United States Canada (3550 – 3650) Canada (3650 – 3700) 3-28 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 77 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.4 GHz OFDM Radio Model Country Code Channel Size Band Edges (MHz) Range of Center Frequencies Available (MHz) 10 MHz 5470 – 5725 5475 – 5720 99 25 5480 – 5715 95 12 5475 – 5595; 5655 5720 ******* 77 20 67 Brazil 20 MHz PMP 450 Series AP, 5.4GHz Australia, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Liechtenstein, Norway, Portugal, Serbia, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom 10 MHz 20 MHz 10 MHz United States, Canada 20 MHz 10 MHz Other 20 MHz ******* 5470 – 5600; 5650 5725 5480 – 5590; 5660 – 5710******* Center Channel Spacing # of Center Channels (based on PMP 450 available range, weather notch-out) # of Nonoverlapping center channels (based on PMP 450 available range) 2.5 MHz 5470 – 5600; 5650 – 5725 5475 – 5595; 5655 - 5720 77 20 5480 – 5590; 5660 – 5715 69 5470 – 5725 5475 - 5720 99 25 5480 – 5715 95 12 Frequencies 5600 – 5650 MHz are excluded, as ten minute Channel Availability Check is required pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-29 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Table 78 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.8 GHz OFDM Radio Model Country Channel Size Denmark, Norway, United Kingdom, Finland 10 MHz Band Edges (MHz) 5760 – 5870 45 12 20 MHz 5765 – 5865 41 10 MHz 5730- 5790; 5820 – 5850 39 5735 – 5785; 5825 – 5845 31 5730 – 5790 25 5735 – 5785 21 57 15 5725 – 5795; 5815 – 5855 10 MHz 10 5725 – 5795 20 MHz 10 MHz 5730 – 5870 5725 – 5875 2.5 MHz 20 MHz 5735 – 5865 53 10 MHz 5730 – 5790; 5820 – 5870 47 20 MHz 5735 – 5785; 5825 – 5865 39 5 MHz 5727.5 – 5847.5 49 25 5730 – 5845 47 12 20 MHz 5735 – 5840 43 5 MHz 5730 - 5845 Switzerland, Liechtenstein 5725 – 5795; 5815 – 5875 10 MHz 5725 - 5850 12 24 47 10 MHz 5725 - 5850 20 MHz 3-30 5755 – 5875; Greece India 10 29 20 MHz Canada, United States # of Nonoverlapping center channels (based on PMP 450 available range) 5735 – 5785; 5825 – 5840 20 MHz Spain Australia # of Center Channels (based on PMP 450 available range, weather notch-out) 37 10 MHz Portugal, Iceland, Serbia Center Channel Spacing 5730 – 5790; 5820 – 5845 5725 – 5795; 5815 – 5850 Germany PMP 450 Series AP, 5.8-GHz Range of Center Frequencies Available (MHz) 5 MHz 5825 – 5875 5730 – 5845 12 5735 – 5845 45 5827.5 – 5872.5 19 10 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Brazil, Vietnam Indonesia Glossary 10 MHz 5830 - 5870 17 20 MHz 5835 - 5865 13 5 MHz 5727.5 – 5847.5 49 25 5730 – 5845 47 12 20 MHz 5735 - 5840 43 5 MHz 5727.5 – 5822.5 39 20 5730 – 5820 37 10 5735 - 5815 33 10 MHz 5725 – 5850 10 MHz 5725 - 5825 20 MHz Table 79 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.4 GHz band Antenna Gain (dBi) Country (18 dBi – 1dB cable loss) Combined TX Default Setting AP EIRP Limit 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Combined TX Default Setting AP EIRP Limit 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Device Country Code Setting United States, Canada 17 10 27 13 30 United States, Canada Brazil 17 10 27 13 30 Brazil Algeria 17 13 30 13 30 Algeria pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-31 PMP 450 Planning Guide Antenna Gain (dBi) Country (18 dBi – 1dB cable loss) Australia 3-32 17 Glossary Combined TX Default Setting AP EIRP Limit 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) 10 27 Combined TX Default Setting AP EIRP Limit 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) 13 30 Device Country Code Setting Australia pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Antenna Gain (dBi) Country (18 dBi – Glossary Combined TX Default Setting Combined TX Default Setting 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) 1dB cable loss) Austria, Belgium, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, France, , Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Macedonia, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Romania, Slovakia, AP EIRP Limit 17 10 Denmark 17 10 Finland 17 10 Germany 17 Greece 17 Liechtenstein 27††††††† AP EIRP Limit 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) 13 30 Device Country Code Setting Other-ETSI Slovenia , Sweden 27 13 30 Denmark 27 13 30 Finland 27 13 30 Germany 10 27 13 30 Greece 17 10 27 13 30 Liechtenstein Norway 17 10 27 13 30 Norway Portugal 17 10 27 13 30 Portugal Spain 17 10 27 13 30 Spain United Kingdom 17 10 27 13 30 United Kingdom Vietnam 17 10 27 13 30 Vietnam Other 17 19 10 No EIRP / Conducted power limit 19 No EIRP / Conducted power limit Other ††††††† At 5.4 GHz, EU regulations are harmonized. 5600 – 5650 MHz excluded, as ten minute Channel Availability Check (CAC) is required pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-33 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary (18 dBi – 1dB cable loss) 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Limit AP EIRP Setting Default TX Combined Limit AP EIRP Setting Default TX Combined Limit AP EIRP Default Antenna Gain (dBi) TX Country Code Combined Table 80 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.8 GHz band Device Country Code Setting 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Australia 17 19 36 19 36 19 36 Australia Brazil 17 24 10 27 13 30 Brazil Canada 17 26 19 36 19 36 Canada Denmark 17 16 33 19 36 Denmark Finland 17 16 33 19 36 Finland Germany 17 16 33 19 36 Germany Greece 17 16 33 19 36 Greece India 17 19 36 19 36 India Iceland 17 16 33 19 36 Iceland Indonesia 17 19 36 19 36 Indonesia Ireland 17 13 30 16 33 Ireland Liechtenstein 17 16 33 19 36 Liechtenstein Norway 17 16 33 19 36 Norway Portugal 17 16 33 19 36 Portugal Serbia 17 16 33 19 36 Serbia Spain 17 16 33 19 36 Spain Switzerland 17 16 33 19 36 Switzerland United Kingdom 17 16 33 19 36 United Kingdom United States 17 19 36 19 36 19 36 United States Vietnam 17 24 10 27 13 30 Vietnam 3-34 19 13 36 30 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary After an AP with DFS is powered on it performs a channel availability check on its main carrier frequency for 1 minute, monitoring for the radar signature without transmitting. If no radar signature is detected during this minute, the module then proceeds to normal beacon transmit mode. If it does detect a radar signature, the frequency is marked for a 30 minute non-occupancy period, and the module moves to its 1st alternate carrier frequency. The AP continues this behavior through its 2nd alternate frequency if needed and then waits until the first frequency ends the 30 minute non-occupancy period. While operating, if the AP detects a weather radar signature it marks the current carrier frequency for a 30 minute non-occupancy period and moves to check the next-in-line carrier frequency. An SM does not begin transmission until it detects a beacon from an AP. If APs are not transmitting, SMs will be silent. Europe applies the ETSI specification to both APs and SMs, while Brazil applies it only to APs. In the ETSI case, when an SM is powered on, it scans to find a Canopy beacon from a AP. If an AP is found, the SM performs a channel availability check on that frequency for 1 minute, monitoring for the radar signature, without transmitting. A DFS decision is made based on the following: • If no radar pulse is detected during this 1 minute, the SM proceeds through normal steps to register to an AP. • If the SM does detect radar, it locks out that frequency for 30 minutes and continues scanning other frequencies in its scan list. After an SM with DFS has seen a radar signature on a frequency and locked out that frequency, it may connect to a different AP if color codes, AP transmitting frequencies, and SM scanned frequencies support that connection. To simplify operation and ensure compliance, an SM takes on the DFS type of the AP to which it registers. For example, when an SM in Europe registers to an AP with the Country Code set to “United Kingdom”, that SM will use ETSI DFS, no matter what its Country Code is set to, even if its Country Code is set to “None”. Note, the operator should still configure the Country Code in the SM correctly, as future releases may use the Country Code for additional region-specific options. For all modules running DFS, the module displays its DFS state on its Home => General Status page as one of the following: • Checking Channel Availability Remaining time n seconds, where n counts down from 60 to • Normal Transmit • Radar Detected Stop Transmitting for n minutes, where n counts down from 30 to 1. • Idle, only for SM/BHS, indicates module is scanning, but has not detected a beacon from an AP/BHM. Once it detects 1. beacon, the SM/BHS begins a Channel Availability Check on that frequency. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-35 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Regulatory Note: A PMP 450 Series AP with a Country Code set to United States will not be configurable to another Country Code by installers or end users. This is in response to FCC KDB 594280 and ensures that end users and professional installers will not have access to settings which could allow a radio to be configured to operate in a manner other than that which was specified in the FCC equipment authorization grant. Within the United States and its territories the PMP 450 Country Code is pre-configured to United States and not selectable in the Configuration, General web page. Radios sold in regions outside of the United States and its territories are required to set the Country Code to the region in which it is used. FCC compliance testing With GPS synchronization installed, the system has been tested for compliance to US (FCC) specifications. It has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA. These limits have been designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference. However the equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other radio communications. There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential environment, notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments. Notwithstanding that Cambium has designed (and qualified) the PMP 450 products to generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential for interference, the PMP 450 product range is not marketed for use in a residential environment. FCC and ICC IDs and certification numbers Table 81 US FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers and Covered Configurations FCC ID Z8H89FT0004 3-36 Industry Canada Cert Number 109W-0004 Module Families PMP 450 AP 2.4-GHz Frequencies 20 MHz channels, centered on 2417.5 – 2460 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band) Antenna (OFDM) 17 dBi Connectorized Maximum Combined Tx Output Power 19 dBm pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide FCC ID Industry Canada Cert Number Module Families Glossary Frequencies Antenna (OFDM) Maximum Combined Tx Output Power 10 MHz channels, centered on 2405 – 2470 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band) 5 MHz channels, centered on 2402.5 – 2475 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band) 20 MHz channels, centered on 3460 – 3640 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band) 109W-0008 PMP 450 AP 3.5-GHz 10 MHz channels, centered on 3455 – 3645 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band) 17 dBi Connectorized 25 dBm 5 MHz channels, centered on 3452.5 3647.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band) 20 MHz channels, centered on 3660 – 3690 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band) Z8H89FT0010 109W-0010 PMP 450 AP 3.6-GHz 17 dBi Connectorized 10 MHz channels, centered on 3655 – 3695 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band) pmp-0047 (March 2014) 25 dBm 22 dBm 3-37 PMP 450 Planning Guide FCC ID Industry Canada Cert Number Module Families Glossary Frequencies Antenna (OFDM) 5 MHz channels, centered on 3652.5 3697.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band) Maximum Combined Tx Output Power 19 dBm 20 MHz channels, centered on 5735-5840 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band) Z8H89FT0002 109W-0002 PMP 450 AP 10 MHz channels, centered on 5730-5845 5.8-GHz in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band) 17 dBi Connectorized 19 dBm 5 MHz channels, centered on 5725-5850 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band) 20 MHz channels, centered on 5480 – 5590; 5660 – 5715 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 5470 – 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band) Z8H89FT0002 109W-0002 PMP 450 AP 5.4-GHz 13 dBm 17 dBi Connectorized 10 MHz channels, centered on 5475 – 5595; 5655 – 5720 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 5470 – 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band) 20 MHz channels, centered on 2417.5 – 2460 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band) Z8H89FT0003 109W-0003 PMP 450 SM 2.4-GHz 10 MHz channels, centered on 2405 – 2470 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band) 3-38 10 dBm 7 dBi Integrated 19 dBm 7 dBi Integrated with 12 dBi Reflector Dish 17 dBm 7 dBi Integrated 19 dBm 7 dBi Integrated with 12 dBi Reflector Dish 17 dBm pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide FCC ID Industry Canada Cert Number Module Families Glossary Frequencies 5 MHz channels, centered on 2402.5 – 2475 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM band) 20 MHz channels, centered on 3460 – 3640 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band) 109W-0007 PMP 450 SM 3.5-GHz 10 MHz channels, centered on 3455 – 3645 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band) 5 MHz channels, centered on 3452.5 3647.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3300 – 3600 MHz ISM band) 20 MHz channels, centered on 3560 – 3690 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band) Z8H89FT0009 109W-0009 PMP 450 SM 3.6-GHz 10 MHz channels, centered on 3555 – 3695 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band) 5 MHz channels, centered on 3552.5 - pmp-0047 (March 2014) Antenna (OFDM) Maximum Combined Tx Output Power 7 dBi Integrated 19 dBm 7 dBi Integrated with 12 dBi Reflector Dish 17 dBm 8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm 8 dBi Integrated with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 25 dBm Connectorized with 22 dBi panel 19 dBm 8 dBi Integrated 22 dBm 8 dBi Integrated with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 22 dBm Connectorized with 22 dBi panel 19 dBm 8 dBi Integrated 19 dBm 3-39 PMP 450 Planning Guide FCC ID Industry Canada Cert Number Module Families Glossary Frequencies 3697.5 in 50 kHz increments (within the 3550 – 3800 MHz ISM band) Antenna (OFDM) Maximum Combined Tx Output Power 8 dBi Integrated with 11 dBi Reflector Dish 19 dBm Connectorized with 22 dBi panel 19 dBm 9 dBi Integrated 20 MHz channels, centered on 5735-5840 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band) 9 dBi Integrated with 14 dBi Reflector Dish 9 dBi Integrated with 5.5 dBi LENS 19 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 8 dBi CLIP 9 dBi Integrated Z8H89FT0001 109W-0001 10 MHz channels, centered on 5730-5845 PMP 450 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 5725SM 5.8-GHz 5850 MHz ISM band) 9 dBi Integrated with 14 dBi Reflector Dish 19 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 5.5 dBi LENS 9 dBi Integrated with 8 dBi CLIP 9 dBi Integrated 5 MHz channels, centered on 5725-5845 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 57255850 MHz ISM band) 9 dBi Integrated with 14 dBi Reflector Dish 9 dBi Integrated with 5.5 dBi LENS 19 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 8 dBi CLIP 3-40 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide FCC ID Industry Canada Cert Number Module Families Glossary Frequencies Antenna (OFDM) 9 dBi Integrated 11 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 14 dBi Reflector Dish 7 dBm 20 MHz channels, centered on 5480 – 5590; 5660 – 5715 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 5470 – 5600; 5650 9 dBi Integrated – 5725 MHz UNII band) with 5.5 dBi LENS Z8H89FT0001 109W-0001 PMP 450 SM 5.4-GHz 10 MHz channels, centered on 5475 – 5595; 5655 – 5720 in 2.5 MHz increments (within the 5470 – 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz UNII band) pmp-0047 (March 2014) Maximum Combined Tx Output Power 15 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 8 dBi CLIP 13 dBm 9 dBi Integrated 10 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 14 dBi Reflector Dish 4 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 5.5 dBi LENS 12 dBm 9 dBi Integrated with 8 dBi CLIP 10 dBm 3-41 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Notifications This section contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are enforced in various regions. PMP 450 regulatory compliance The PMP 450 complies with the regulations that are enforced in the USA and Canada. The relevant notifications are specified in this section. PMP 450 FCC and IC notification U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) Notification. This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency band in which the system operates is ‘license exempt’ and the system is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference. The licensing authority does not guarantee protection against interference from other products and installations. This device complies with part 15 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In Canada, users should be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of the 5650 – 5850 MHz spectrum and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to license-exempt local area networks (LELAN). Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 3-42 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary • Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit; • Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is connected to; • Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help. Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply. This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model number if Category II) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son numéro de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorie I) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur. Table 82 Industry Canada approved antenna list Approved Antenna Model Description Input Impedance C024045D601A 2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector 50 Ω C030045D901A 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector 50 Ω MA-WA36-DP21N 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 12 Degree Panel 50 Ω 85009324001 5 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector 50 Ω 85009325001 5 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector 50 Ω Equipment Disposal Waste (Disposal) of Electronic and Electric Equipment pmp-0047 (March 2014) Please do not dispose of Electronic and Electric Equipment or Electronic and Electric Accessories with your household waste. In some countries or regions, collection systems have been set up to handle waste of electrical and electronic equipment. In European Union countries, please contact your local equipment supplier representative or service center for information about the waste collection system in your country. 3-43 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary European Union Notification for 5.4 and 5.8 GHz Product The 5.4 and 5.8 GHz connectorized product is a two-way radio transceiver suitable for use in Broadband Wireless Access System (WAS), Radio Local Area Network (RLAN), or Fixed Wireless Access (FWA) systems. It is a Class 2 device and uses operating frequencies that are not harmonized throughout the EU member states. The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Hereby, Cambium declares that the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz product complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec-doc. This equipment is marked 1999/5/EC. to show compliance with the European R&TTE directive Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States (www.cept.org) When operated in accordance with the instructions for use, Cambium Wireless equipment operating in the 5.4 GHz bands is compliant with CEPT Recommendation 70-03 Annex 3 for Wideband Data Transmission and HIPERLANs. For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the transmit power (EIRP) from the integrated antenna or a connectorized antenna shall be no more than 0.5 W (27 dBm). For EU member states, RLAN equipment in the 5.4GHz bands is exempt from individual licensing under Commission Recommendation 2003/203/EC. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply. Also see www.ero.dk for further information. 10 MHz channels are used, centered on 5475 to 5595 and 5655 to 5715 in 5 MHz increments. This is within the 5470 to 5725 MHz U-NII band with 5600 to 5650 MHz excluded. Cambium Radio equipment operating in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band are categorized as “Class 1” devices within the EU in accordance with ECC DEC(04)08 and are “CE” marked to show compliance with the European Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec_doc/. A European Commission decision, implemented by Member States on 31 October 2005, makes the frequency band 5470-5725 MHz available in all EU Member States for wireless access systems. Under this decision, the designation of Canopy 5.4GHz products become “Class 1 devices” and these do not require notification under article 6, section 4 of the R&TTE Directive. Consequently, these 5.4GHz products are only marked with the symbol and may be used in any member state. 3-44 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary UK Notification The 5.8 GHz connectorized product has been notified for operation in the UK, and when operated in accordance with instructions for use it is compliant with UK Interface Requirement IR2007. For UK use, installations must conform to the requirements of IR2007 in terms of EIRP spectral density against elevation profile above the local horizon in order to protect Fixed Satellite Services. The frequency range 5795-5815 MHz is assigned to Road Transport & Traffic Telematics (RTTT) in the U.K. and shall not be used by FWA systems in order to protect RTTT devices. UK licensing specifies that radiolocation services shall be protected by a Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) mechanism to prevent co-channel operation in the presence of radar signals. Brazil Notification For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power from the integrated antenna or connectorized antenna shall not exceed 27 dBm (0.5 W). Please note, 3.5GHz and 3.6GHz has been notified to all EU member states as of the time of the creation of this document. The operator is responsible for enabling the DFS feature on any Canopy 5.4 GHz radio by setting the Region Code to “Brazil”, including after the module is reset to factory defaults. Important Note: This equipment operates as a secondary application, so it has no rights against harmful interference, even if generated by similar equipment, and cannot cause harmful interference on systems operating as primary applications. Luxembourg Notification 5.4GHz products can only be used for mobile services. Czech Republic Notification 5.4 GHz products can be operated in accordance with the Czech General License No. GL-30/R/2000. pmp-0047 (March 2014) 3-45 PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Italy Notification In Italy, there is a regulation which requires a general authorization of any 5.4 GHz radio link which is used outside the operator’s own premises. It is the responsibility of the installer or operator to have the link authorized. Details may be found at: http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&idmenu=672&idarea1=593& andor=AND&idarea2=1052&id=68433§ionid=1,16&viewType=1&showMenu=1&showCat=1&idarea3=0&a ndorcat=AND&partebassaType=0&idareaCalendario1=0&MvediT=1&idarea4=0&showArchiveNewsBotton=0&di rectionidUser=0 The form to be used for general authorization may be found at: http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/images/stories/mise_extra/Allegato%20n19.doc. 3.5GHz and 3.6GHz has been notified to all EU member states. 3-46 pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Appendix A: Glossary Table 83 Glossary Term Definition 10Base-T Technology in Ethernet communications that can deliver 10 Mb of data across 328 feet (100 meters) of CAT 5 cable. 169.254.0.0 Gateway IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules. 169.254.1.1 IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules. 255.255.0.0 Subnet mask default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules and in Microsoft and Apple operating systems. 802.3 An IEEE standard that defines the contents of frames that are transferred through Ethernet connections. Each of these frames contains a preamble, the address to which the frame is sent, the address that sends the frame, the length of the data to expect, the data, and a checksum to validate that no contents were lost. 802.11 The IEEE standard for wireless local area networks. 802.15 The IEEE standard for wireless personal area networks. Access Point Cluster Two to six Access Point Modules that together distribute network or Internet services to a community of subscribers. Each Access Point Module covers a 60° or 90° sector. This cluster covers as much as 360°. Also known as AP cluster. Access Point Module Also known as AP. One module that distributes network or Internet services in a 60° or 90° sector. ACT/4 Second-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is lit when data activity is present on the Ethernet link. Activate To provide feature capability to a module, but not to enable (turn on) the feature in the module. See also Enable. Address Resolution Protocol Protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network element to correlate a host IP address to the Ethernet address of the host. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html. Aggregate Throughput The sum of the throughputs in the uplink and the downlink. AP Access Point Module. One module that distributes network or Internet services to subscriber modules. APs MIB Management Information Base file that defines objects that are specific to the Access Point Module. See also Management Information Base. PMP 450 Planning Guide II Glossary Term Definition ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network element to correlate a host IP address to the Ethernet address of the host. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html. ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One language. The format of the text files that compose the Management Information Base. Attenuation Reduction of signal strength caused by the travel from the transmitter to the receiver, and caused by any object between. In the absence of objects between, a signal that has a short wavelength experiences a high degree of attenuation nevertheless. BER Bit Error Rate. The ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received. Bit Error Rate Ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received. Box MIB Management Information Base file that defines module-level objects. See also Management Information Base. Bridge Network element that uses the physical address (not the logical address) of another to pass data. The bridge passes the data to either the destination address, if found in the simple routing table, or to all network segments other than the one that transmitted the data. Modules are Layer 2 bridges except that, where NAT is enabled for an SM, the SM is a Layer 3 switch. Compare to Switch and Router, and see also NAT. Bridge Entry Timeout Field Value that the operator sets as the maximum interval for no activity with another module, whose MAC address is the Bridge Entry. This interval should be longer than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network. Buckets Theoretical data repositories that can be filled at preset rates or emptied when preset conditions are experienced, such as when data is transferred. Burst Preset amount limit of data that may be continuously transferred. C/I Ratio Ratio of intended signal (carrier) to unintended signal (interference) received. Carrier-tointerference Ratio Ratio of intended reception to unintended reception. CarSenseLost Field This field displays how many carrier sense lost errors occurred on the Ethernet controller. CAT 5 Cable Cable that delivers Ethernet communications from module to module. Later modules auto-sense whether this cable is wired in a straight-through or crossover scheme. CIR Committed Information Rate. For an SM or specified group of SMs, a level of bandwidth that can be guaranteed to never fall below a specified minimum (unless oversubscribed). In the Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Low Priority Uplink CIR, Low Priority Downlink CIR, High Priority Uplink CIR, and High Priority Downlink CIR parameters. CLIP Cassegrain Lens for Improved Performance pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition Cluster Management Module Module that provides power, GPS timing, and networking connections for an AP cluster. Also known as CMM. CMM Cluster Management Module. A module that provides power, GPS timing, and networking connections for an Access Point cluster. CodePoint See DiffServ. Color Code Field Module parameter that identifies the other modules with which communication is allowed. The range of valid values is 0 to 255. Community String Field Control string that allows a network management station to access MIB information about the module. Country Code Unique identifier that helps distinguish the particular transmits and receives rules for one country from another country in that same region (see Region Code). CRCError Field This field displays how many CRC errors occurred on the Ethernet controller. Data Encryption Standard Over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. Data Encryption Standard (DES) performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. Demilitarized Zone Internet Protocol area outside of a firewall. Defined in RFC 2647. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html. DES Data Encryption Standard. An over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. Desensed Received an undesired signal that was strong enough to make the module insensitive to the desired signal. DFS See Dynamic Frequency Selection DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, defined in RFC 2131. Protocol that enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a default gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves IP addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different network within the system. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2131.html. See also Static IP Address Assignment. pmp-0047 (March 2014) Field Code Changed III PMP 450 Planning Guide Term Definition DiffServ Differentiated Services, consistent with RFC 2474. A byte in the type of service (TOS) field of packets whose values correlates to the channel on which the packet should be sent. The value is a numeric code point. Cambium modules map each of 64 code points to values of 0 through 7. Three of these code points have fixed values, and the remaining 61 are settable. Values of 0 through 3 map to the low-priority channel; 4 through 7 to the high-priority channel. The mappings are the same as 802.1p VLAN priorities. (However, configuring DiffServ does not automatically enable the VLAN feature.) Among the settable parameters, the values are set in the AP for all downlinks within the sector and in the SM for each uplink. Disable To turn off a feature in the module after both the feature activation file has activated the module to use the feature and the operator has enabled the feature in the module. See also Activate and Enable. DMZ Demilitarized Zone as defined in RFC 2647. An Internet Protocol area outside of a firewall. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html. Dynamic Frequency Selection IV Glossary A requirement in certain countries and regions for systems to detect interference from other systems, notably radar systems, and to avoid co-channel operation with these systems. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP. Electronic Serial Number Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number. Same as MAC Address. Enable To turn on a feature in the module after the feature activation file has activated the module to use the feature. See also Activate. ESN Electronic Serial Number. The hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number. Same as MAC Address. EthBusErr Field This field displays how many Ethernet bus errors occurred on the Ethernet controller. Ethernet Protocol Any of several IEEE standards that define the contents of frames that are transferred from one network element to another through Ethernet connections. Fade Margin The difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is characteristic of a more reliable link. Standard operating margin. FCC Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.A. Field-programmable Gate Array Array of logic, relational data, and wiring data that is factory programmed and can be reprogrammed. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition File Transfer Protocol Utility that transfers of files through TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between computing devices that do not operate on the same platform. Defined in RFC 959. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html. FPGA Field-programmable Gate Array. An array of logic, relational data, and wiring data that is factory programmed and can be reprogrammed. Frame Timing Pulse Gated Field Toggle parameter that prevents or allows the module to continue to propagate GPS sync timing when the module no longer receives the timing. Free Space Path Loss Signal attenuation that is naturally caused by atmospheric conditions and by the distance between the antenna and the receiver. Fresnel Zone Space in which no object should exist that can attenuate, diffract, or reflect a transmitted signal before the signal reaches the target receiver. FTP File Transfer Protocol, defined in RFC 959. Utility that transfers of files through TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between computing devices that do not operate on the same platform. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html. Global Positioning System Network of satellites that provides absolute time to networks on earth, which use the time signal to synchronize transmission and reception cycles (to avoid interference) and to provide reference for troubleshooting activities. GPS Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that provides absolute time to networks on earth, which use the time signal to synchronize transmission and reception cycles (to avoid interference) and to provide reference for troubleshooting activities. GPS/3 Third-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode for an Access Point Module, this LED is continuously lit as the module receives sync pulse. In the operating mode for a Subscriber, this LED flashes on and off to indicate that the module is not registered. GUI Graphical user interface. High-priority Channel Channel that supports low-latency traffic (such as Voice over IP) over low-latency traffic (such as standard web traffic and file downloads). To recognize the latency tolerance of traffic, this channel reads the IPv4 Type of Service DiffServ Control Point (DSCP) bits. Enabling the high-priority channel reduces the maximum number of SMs that can be served in the sector. HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol, used to make the Internet resources available on the World Wide Web. Defined in RFC 2068. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2068.html. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocols defined in RFC 792, used to identify Internet Protocol (IP)-level problems and to allow IP links to be tested. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc792.html. indiscards count Field How many inbound packets were discarded without errors that would have prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol. (Some of these packets may have been discarded to increase buffer space.) pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide VI Glossary Term Definition inerrors count Field How many inbound packets contained errors that prevented their delivery to a higherlayer protocol. innucastpkts count Field How many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol. inoctets count Field How many octets were received on the interface, including those that deliver framing information. Intel A registered trademark of Intel Corporation. inucastpkts count Field How many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol. inunknownprotos count Field How many inbound packets were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. IP Internet Protocol defined in RFC 791. The Network Layer in the TCP/IP protocol stack. This protocol is applied to addressing, routing, and delivering, and re-assembling data packets into the Data Link layer of the protocol stack. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc791.html. IP Address 32-bit binary number that identifies a network element by both network and host. See also Subnet Mask. IPv4 Traditional version of Internet Protocol, which defines 32-bit fields for data transmission. ISM Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment radio frequency band, in the 900-MHz, 2.4-GHz, and 5.8-GHz ranges. L2TP over IPSec Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security. One of several virtual private network (VPN) implementation schemes. Regardless of whether Subscriber Modules have the Network Address Translation feature (NAT) enabled, they support VPNs that are based on this protocol. Late Collision Field This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the Ethernet controller. A normal collision occurs during the first 512 bits of the frame transmission. A collision that occurs after the first 512 bits is considered a late collision. A late collision is a serious network problem because the frame being transmitted is discarded. A late collision is most commonly caused by a mismatch between duplex configurations at the ends of a link segment. Latency Tolerance Acceptable tolerance for delay in the transfer of data to and from a module. Line of Sight Wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to module. The path that results provides both ideal aim and an ideal Fresnel zone. LNK/5 Furthest left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is continuously lit when the Ethernet link is present. In the aiming mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED is part of a bar graph that indicates the quality of the RF link. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition Logical Unit ID Final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module. LOS Line of sight. The wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to module. The path that results provides both ideal aim and an ideal Fresnel zone. LUID Logical Unit ID. The final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module. MAC Address Media Access Control address. The hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number. Management Information Base Space that allows a program (agent) in the network to relay information to a network monitor about the status of defined variables (objects). Maximum Information Rate (MIR) The cap applied to the bandwidth of an SM or specified group of SMs. In the Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Sustained Uplink Data Rate, Uplink Burst Allocation, Sustained Downlink Data Rate, and Downlink Burst Allocation parameters. Media Access Control Address Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number. MIB Management Information Base. Space that allows a program (agent) in the network to relay information to a network monitor about the status of defined variables (objects). MIR See Maximum Information Rate. NAT Network Address Translation defined in RFC 1631. A scheme that isolates Subscriber Modules from the Internet. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html. NEC National Electrical Code. The set of national wiring standards that are enforced in the U.S.A. NetBIOS Protocol defined in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 to support an applications programming interface in TCP/IP. This interface allows a computer to transmit and receive data with another host computer on the network. RFC 1001 defines the concepts and methods. RFC 1002 defines the detailed specifications. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1001.html and http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1002.html. Network Address Translation Scheme that defines the Access Point Module as a proxy server to isolate registered Subscriber Modules from the Internet. Defined in RFC 1631. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html. Network Management Station See NMS. NMS Network Management Station. A monitor device that uses Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to control, gather, and report information about predefined network variables (objects). See also Simple Network Management Protocol. pmp-0047 (March 2014) VII PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition Object Network variable that is defined in the Management Information Base. outdiscards count Field How many outbound packets were discarded without errors that would have prevented their transmission. (Some of these packets may have been discarded to increase buffer space.) outerrrors count Field How many outbound packets contained errors that prevented their transmission. outnucastpkts count Field How many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested transmission to a non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address. The number includes those that were discarded or not sent. outoctets count Field How many octets were transmitted out of the interface, including those that deliver framing information. outucastpkts count Field How many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested transmission to a subnetwork-unicast address. The number includes those that were discarded or not sent. Override Plug Device that enables the operator to regain control of a module that has been locked by the No Remote Access feature, the 802.3 Link Disable feature, or a password or IP address that cannot be recalled. This device can be either fabricated on site or ordered. PMP See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol. Point-to-Multipoint Protocol Defined in RFC 2178, which specifies that data that originates from a central network element can be received by all other network elements, but data that originates from a non-central network element can be received by only the central network element. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2178.html. Also referenced as PMP. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. Supported on SMs for operators who use PPPoE in other parts of their network operators who want to deploy PPPoE to realize per-subscriber authentication, metrics, and usage control. VIII PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol. One of several virtual private network implementations. Regardless of whether the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature enabled, Subscriber Modules support VPNs that are based on this protocol. Protective Earth Connection to earth (which has a charge of 0 volts). Also known as ground. Proxy Server Network computer that isolates another from the Internet. The proxy server communicates for the other computer, and sends replies to only the appropriate computer, which has an IP address that is not unique or not registered. PTMP See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol. Quick Start Interface page that requires minimal configuration for initial module operation. Radio Signal Strength Indicator Relative measure of the strength of a received signal. An acceptable link displays an Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value of greater than 700. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition Recharging Resumed accumulation of data in available data space (buckets). See Buckets. Reflection Change of direction and reduction of amplitude of a signal that encounters an object larger than the wavelength. Reflection may cause an additional copy of the wavelength to arrive after the original, unobstructed wavelength arrives. This causes partial cancellation of the signal and may render the link unacceptable. However, in some instances where the direct signal cannot be received, the reflected copy may be received and render an otherwise unacceptable link acceptable. Region Code A general geographical area that can be further segmented into specific Countries (see Country Code). Units shipped to regions other than the United States must be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory requirements. Registrations MIB Management Information Base file that defines registrations for global items such as product identities and product components. See also Management Information Base. RetransLimitExp Field This field displays how many times the retransmit limit has expired. RF Radio frequency. How many times each second a cycle in the antenna occurs, from positive to negative and back to positive amplitude. RJ-11 Standard cable that is typically used for telephone line or modem connection. RJ-45 Standard cable that is typically used for Ethernet connection. This cable may be wired as straight-through or as crossover. Later modules auto-sense whether the cable is straight-through or crossover. Router Network element that uses the logical (IP) address of another to pass data to only the intended recipient. Compare to Switch and Bridge. RSSI Radio Signal Strength Indicator. A relative measure of the strength of a received signal. An acceptable link displays an RSSI value of greater than 700. RxBabErr Field This field displays how many receiver babble errors occurred. RxOverrun Field This field displays how many receiver overrun errors occurred on the Ethernet controller. Secure Shell A trademark of SSH Communications Security. Self-interference Interference with a module from another module in the same network. SES/2 Third-from-right LED in the module. In the Access Point Module, this LED is unused. In the operating mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED flashes on and off to indicate that the module is not registered. In the aiming mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED is part of a bar graph that indicates the quality of the RF link. Simple Network Management Protocol Standard that is used for communications between a program (agent) in the network and a network management station (monitor). Defined in RFC 1157. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1157.html. pmp-0047 (March 2014) IX PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition SM Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or Internet services by communication with an Access Point Module or an Access Point cluster. SM MIB Management Information Base file that defines objects that are specific to the Subscriber Module. See also Management Information Base. SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol, defined in RFC 1157. SNMP Trap Capture of information that informs the network monitor through Simple Network Management Protocol of a monitored occurrence in the module. Static IP Address Assignment Assignment of Internet Protocol address that can be changed only manually. Thus static IP address assignment requires more configuration time and consumes more of the available IP addresses than DHCP address assignment does. RFC 2050 provides guidelines for the static allocation of IP addresses. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2050.html. See also DHCP. Subnet Mask 32-bit binary number that filters an IP address to reveal what part identifies the network and what part identifies the host. The number of subnet mask bits that are set to 1 indicates how many leading bits of the IP address identify the network. The number of subnet mask bits that are set 0 indicate how many trailing bits of the IP address identify the host. Subscriber Module Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or Internet services by communication with an Access Point Module or an Access Point cluster. Sustained Data Rate Preset rate limit of data transfer. Switch Network element that uses the port that is associated with the physical address of another to pass data to only the intended recipient. Compare to Bridge and Router. SYN/1 Second-from-right LED in the module. In the Access Point Module or in a registered Subscriber, this LED is continuously lit to indicate the presence of sync. In the operating mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED flashes on and to indicate that the module is not registered. Sync GPS (Global Positioning System) absolute time, which is passed from one module to another. Sync enables timing that prevents modules from transmitting or receiving interference. Sync also provides correlative time stamps for troubleshooting efforts. TCP Alternatively known as Transmission Control Protocol or Transport Control Protocol. The Transport Layer in the TCP/IP protocol stack. This protocol is applied to assure that data packets arrive at the target network element and to control the flow of data through the Internet. Defined in RFC 793. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc793.html. TDD Time Division Duplexing. Synchronized data transmission with some time slots allocated to devices transmitting on the uplink and some to the device transmitting on the downlink. pmp-0047 (March 2014) PMP 450 Planning Guide Glossary Term Definition telnet Utility that allows a client computer to update a server. A firewall can prevent the use of the telnet utility to breach the security of the server. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc818.html, http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc854.html and http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc855.html. Textual Conventions MIB Management Information Base file that defines system-specific textual conventions. See also Management Information Base. Tokens Theoretical amounts of data. See also Buckets. TOS 8-bit field in that prioritizes data in a IP transmission. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1349.html. TxUnderrun Field This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors occurred on the Ethernet controller. UDP User Datagram Protocol. A set of Network, Transport, and Session Layer protocols that RFC 768 defines. These protocols include checksum and address information but does not retransmit data or process any errors. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc768.html. udp User-defined type of port. U-NII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure radio frequency band, in the 5.1-GHz through 5.8-GHz ranges. VID VLAN identifier. See also VLAN. VLAN Virtual local area network. An association of devices through software that contains broadcast traffic, as routers would, but in the switch-level protocol. VPN Virtual private network for communication over a public network. One typical use is to connect remote employees, who are at home or in a different city, to their corporate network over the Internet. Any of several VPN implementation schemes is possible. SMs support L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security) VPNs and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs, regardless of whether the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature enabled. pmp-0047 (March 2014) XI
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Author : Martin Gray Create Date : 2014:03:10 13:48:33-05:00 Keywords : pmp-0047 Modify Date : 2014:03:10 13:51:26-05:00 Subject : 12.1.2 Language : EN-US Tagged PDF : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Metadata Date : 2014:03:10 13:51:26-05:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 11 for Word Document ID : uuid:ea6d04a6-354a-4c8c-8d9c-a9511d915b8c Instance ID : uuid:7b22bf29-9e95-4777-b461-91d1402bcf70 Format : application/pdf Title : PMP 450 Planning Guide Description : 12.1.2 Creator : Martin Gray Producer : Adobe PDF Library 11.0 Source Modified : D:20140310184604 Company : Cambium Networks Category : September 2013 A4 Date : January 2013 A4 Ordno : pmp-0047 Headline : 12.1.2 Page Layout : OneColumn Page Count : 223EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools